Brother Mfc 9325Cw Owner S Manual

Brother-Mfc-9125Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9125cn-owner-s-manual

MFC-9325CW en-US%5CMFC%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_MFC_9125CN_9325CW_EN_5693

2014-07-05

: Brother Brother-Mfc-9325Cw-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9325cw-owner-s-manual brother pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 267

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

USER’S GUIDE
MFC-9125CN
MFC-9325CW

Version 0
USA/CAN

If you need to call Customer Service
Please complete the following information for future
reference:
Model Number: MFC-9125CN and MFC-9325CW
(Circle your model number)
Serial Number: 1
Date of Purchase:
Place of Purchase:
1

The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain
this User’s Guide with your sales receipt as a
permanent record of your purchase, in the event of
theft, fire or warranty service.

http://www.brother.com/registration/
By registering your product with Brother, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product
should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss
covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special
offers.
The most convenient and efficient way to register your new product is
online at http://www.brother.com/registration/

Brother numbers
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.

Register your product
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration and Test Sheet or, for your
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at

http://www.brother.com/registration/

FAQs (frequently asked questions)
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function
Center needs. You can download the latest software and utilities and read FAQs and
troubleshooting tips to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.

http://solutions.brother.com/
Note
You can check here for Brother driver updates.
To keep your machine’s performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade
(Windows®).

For Customer Service
In USA:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
1-901-379-1215 (fax)

In Canada:

1-877-BROTHER
(514) 685-4898 (fax)

Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).

Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.
i

Ordering accessories and supplies
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or
American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit us online
for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for purchase.)

Note
In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.
In USA:

1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)
1-800-947-1445 (fax)

http://www.brothermall.com/
In Canada:

1-877-BROTHER

http://www.brother.ca/
Description

Item

Toner Cartridge

TN-210BK (Approx. 2,200 pages) 1 2

Toner Cartridge

TN-210C (Approx. 1,400 pages) 1 2

Toner Cartridge

TN-210M (Approx. 1,400 pages) 1 2

Toner Cartridge

TN-210Y (Approx. 1,400 pages) 1 2

4 pcs. Drum Unit

DR-210CL (Approx. 15,000 pages ea. drum unit) 1 3 4

1 pc. Drum Unit

DR-210CL-BK (Approx. 15,000 pages ea.) 1 3 4

1 pc. Drum Unit

DR-210CL-CMY (Approx. 15,000 pages ea.) 1 3 4

Waste Toner Box

WT-200CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Belt Unit

BU-200CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Telephone Line Cord

LG3077001

User’s Guide

LS8782001 (English for USA and Canada)
LS8782002 (French for Canada)

Quick Setup Guide

(MFC-9125CN) LS8783001 (English for USA and Canada)
(MFC-9325CW) LS8795001 (English for USA and Canada)
(MFC-9125CN) LS8783002 (French for Canada)
(MFC-9325CW) LS8795002 (French for Canada)

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties
(USA and Canada)
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR
AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE
SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS
OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT
PERMITTED BY SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.

Compilation and Publication Notice
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.

iii

Brother™ Digital Color One-Year Limited Warranty and
Replacement Service (USA Only)
Who is covered:
 This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given
only to the original end-user/retail purchaser
(referred to in this warranty as “Original
Purchaser”) of the accompanying product,
consumables and accessories (collectively
referred to in this warranty as “this Product”).
 If you purchased a product from someone
other than an authorized Brother reseller in
the United States or if the product was used
(including but not limited to floor models or
refurbished product by someone other than
Brother), prior to your purchase you are not
the Original Purchaser and the product that
you purchased is not covered by this
warranty.
What is covered:
 This Product includes a Machine and
Consumable
and
Accessory
Items.
Consumable and Accessory Items include
but are not limited to Toner Cartridges, Drum
Units, Belt Unit, and Waste Toner Box.
 Except as otherwise provided herein,
Brother warrants that the Machine and the
accompanying
Consumable
and
Accessory Items will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship, when used
under normal conditions.
 This warranty applies only to products
purchased and used in the United States.
For products purchased in, but used
outside, the United States, this warranty
covers only warranty service within the
United States (and does not include
shipping outside the United States).
What is the length of the Warranty Periods:
 Machines: one year from the original
purchase date.
 Accompanying Consumable and Accessory
Items: 90 days from the original purchase
date or the rated life of consumable,
whichever comes first.
What is NOT covered:
This warranty does not cover:
1 Physical damage to this Product;
2 Damage caused by improper installation,
improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect
or accident (including but not limited to
transporting this Product without the proper
preparation and/or packaging);
3 Damage caused by another device or
software used with this Product (including
but not limited to damage resulting from
use of non Brother™-brand parts and
Consumable and Accessory Items);

4 Consumable and Accessory Items that
expired in accordance with a rated life;
5 Problems arising from other than defects in
materials or workmanship; and,
6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such
as Paper Feeding Kit and Fuser Unit.
This limited warranty is VOID if this Product
has been altered or modified in any way
(including but not limited to attempted warranty
repair without authorization from Brother
and/or alteration/removal of the serial
number).
What to do if you think your Product is
eligible for warranty service:
Report your issue to either our Customer
Service Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877276-8437) or to a Brother Authorized Service
Center within the applicable warranty
period.
Supply Brother or the Brother
Authorized Service Center with a copy of your
dated bill of sale showing that this Product was
purchased within the U.S. For the name of
local Brother Authorized Service Center(s),
call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or
visit www.brother-usa.com.
What Brother will ask you to do:
After contacting Brother or a Brother
Authorized Service Center, you may be
required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or
send the Product properly packaged, freight
prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center
together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.
You are responsible for the cost of
shipping, packing product, and insurance
(if you desire). You are also responsible for
loss or damage to this Product in shipping,
so we would recommend that you insure
your product.
What Brother will do:
If the problem reported concerning your
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable
and Accessory Items is covered by this
warranty and if you first reported the problem
to Brother or an Authorized Service Center
within the applicable warranty period, Brother
or its Authorized Service Center will repair or
replace the Machine and/or accompanying
Consumable and Accessory Items at no
charge to you for parts or labor. The decision
as to whether to repair or replace the Machine
and/or accompanying Consumable and
Accessory Items is made by Brother in its sole
discretion. Brother reserves the right to supply
a refurbished or remanufactured replacement

Brother™ Digital Color One-Year Limited Warranty and
Replacement Service (USA Only)
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable
and Accessory Items and use refurbished
parts provided such replacement products
conform to the manufacturer’s specifications
for new product/parts. The repaired or
replacement Machine and/or accompanying
Consumable and Accessory Items will be
returned to you freight prepaid or made
available for you to pick up at a conveniently
located Authorized Service Center.
If the Machine and/or accompanying
Consumable and Accessory Items are not
covered by this warranty (either stage), you
will be charged for shipping the Machine
and/or accompanying Consumable and
Accessory Items back to you and charged for
any service and/or replacement parts/products
at Brother’s then current published rates.
The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and
exclusive remedies under this warranty.
What happens when Brother elects to
replace your Machine:
When a replacement Machine is authorized by
Brother, and you have delivered the Machine
to an Authorized Service Center, the
Authorized Service Center will provide you
with a replacement Machine after receiving
one from Brother. If you are dealing directly
with Brother’s Express Exchange Service
Brother will send to you a replacement
Machine shipped for receipt within two
business days, with the understanding that
you will, after receipt of the replacement
Machine, supply the required proof of
purchase information, together with the
Machine that Brother agreed to replace. You
are then expected to pack the Machine that
Brother agreed to replace in the package from
the replacement Machine and return it to
Brother using the pre-paid freight bill supplied
by Brother in accordance with the instructions
provided by Brother. Since you will be in
possession of two machines, Brother will
require that you provide a valid major credit
card number. Brother will issue a hold against
the credit card account number that you
provide until Brother receives your original
Product and determines that your original
Product is entitled to warranty coverage. Your
credit card will be charged up to the cost of a
new Product only if: (i) you do not return your
original Product to Brother within five (5)
business days; (ii) the problems with your
original Product are not covered by the limited
warranty; (iii) the proper packaging
instructions are not followed and has caused
damage to the product; or (iv) the warranty

period on your original Product has expired or
has not been sufficiently validated with a copy
of the proof of purchase (bill of sale). The
replacement Machine you receive (even if
refurbished or remanufactured) will be
covered by the balance of the limited warranty
period remaining on the original Product, plus
an additional thirty (30) days. You will keep the
replacement Machine that is sent to you and
your original Machine shall become the
property of Brother. Retain your original
Accessory Items and a copy of the return
freight bill, signed by the courier.
Limitations:
Brother is not responsible for damage to or
loss of any equipment, media, programs or
data related to the use of this Product. Except
for the repair or replacement as described
above, Brother shall not be liable for any
direct, indirect, incidental or consequential
damages or specific relief. Because some
states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of consequential or incidental damages, the
above limitation may not apply to you.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR
ORAL,
WHETHER
EXPRESSED
BY
AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,
DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND
ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS
ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY
DISCLAIMED.
 This Limited Warranty is the only warranty
that Brother is giving for this Product. It is
the final expression and the exclusive and
only statement of Brother’s obligations to
you. It replaces all other agreements and
understandings that you may have with
Brother or its representatives.
 This warranty gives you certain rights and
you may also have other rights that may
vary from state to state.
 This Limited Warranty (and Brother’s
obligation to you) may not be changed in
any way unless you and Brother sign the
same piece of paper in which we (1) refer
to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)
describe the change to this warranty and
(3) agree to make that change.
Important: We recommend that you keep all
original packing materials, in the event that
you ship this Product

BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER / FAX MACHINE
LIMITED WARRANTY
(Canada only)
Pursuant to the limited warranty of 1 year from the date of purchase for labour and parts, Brother
International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its Authorized Service Centres, will repair or
replace (at Brother’s sole discretion) this MFC/Fax machine free of charge if defective in material or
workmanship. This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in Canada.
This limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation, ink cartridges, print
cartridges, print rolls, thermal paper rolls, toner cartridges, drum units, OPC belts, fixing units, print heads, paper
feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning rollers, waste toner packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect,
misuse or improper installation or operation, any damage caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or
tampering by anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service Representative, or if shipped out of the country.
The use of supplies or consumable items that are non-Brother products may void your warranty. This
limited warranty ceases when this machine is rented, sold, or otherwise disposed of. Operation of the
MFC/Fax machine in excess of the specifications or with the Serial Number or Rating Label removed
shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end-user/purchaser.
In order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Fax machine must be delivered or shipped freight prepaid
by the end-user/purchaser to a “Brother” Authorized Service Centre, together with your Canadian Proof
of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.
When shipping or transporting your MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your Operation Manual for the
proper packaging procedures.
For Laser and LED units: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner
packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during shipping or transport will cause severe damage to the
Laser MFC/Fax machine and will void the Warranty.
For inkjet units: (When shipping your Inkjet MFC/Fax machine remove the ink cartridges and replace them with
the original protective parts. If original protective parts are not available, leave ink cartridges installed. Please
avoid shipping the unit without original protective parts or ink cartridges.) Damage to your print head resulting from
packing the Inkjet MFC/Fax machine without the ink cartridges or the protective parts will void your warranty.
Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during shipping and will void the
warranty.
BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATIONS, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW
CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.
No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized Service
Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty or modify this
warranty. The warranty states Brother’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy against Brother for any
failure of the MFC/Fax machine to operate properly.
Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of this MFC/Fax
machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential, exemplary, or punitive
damages, including lost profits, arising from the use of or inability to use the product, even if advised by
the end user/purchaser of the possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do not allow the
above limitation of liability, such limitation, may not apply to you.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may
also have other rights which vary from Province to Province.
Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized Service Centres
throughout Canada. For Technical Assistance or for the name and
location of your nearest Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-BROTHER.
Internet support: support@brother.ca or browse Brother’s Web Site www.brother.ca.

Table of Contents
Section I
1

General

General information

Using the documentation ....................................................................................... 2
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation .................................... 2
Accessing the Software User’s Guide and Network User’s Guide ........................ 3
Viewing documentation ................................................................................... 3
Accessing Brother support (Windows®) ................................................................ 5
Control panel overview .......................................................................................... 6
Data LED indications ..................................................................................... 10

Loading paper and documents

Loading paper and print media ............................................................................ 11
Loading paper in the standard paper tray...................................................... 11
Loading paper in the manual feed slot .......................................................... 13
Unprintable area ............................................................................................ 17
Acceptable paper and other print media.............................................................. 18
Recommended paper and print media .......................................................... 18
Type and size of paper .................................................................................. 18
Handling and using special paper ................................................................. 20
Loading documents ............................................................................................. 23
Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................ 23
Using the scanner glass ................................................................................ 24

General Setup

Mode Timer.......................................................................................................... 25
Paper settings...................................................................................................... 25
Paper Type .................................................................................................... 25
Paper Size ..................................................................................................... 25
Volume settings ................................................................................................... 26
Ring volume................................................................................................... 26
Beeper volume .............................................................................................. 26
Speaker volume............................................................................................. 26
Automatic daylight savings time .......................................................................... 27
Ecology features .................................................................................................. 27
Toner Save .................................................................................................... 27
Sleep Time .................................................................................................... 27
LCD Contrast ....................................................................................................... 28
Dial Prefix ............................................................................................................ 28
Setting up the prefix number ......................................................................... 28
Changing the prefix number .......................................................................... 28

vii

Security features

Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9325CW only) ..................................................29
Setting the password for the administrator ...................................................29
Changing the password for the administrator ................................................30
Setting up the public user mode ....................................................................30
Setting up restricted users .............................................................................31
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off.............................................................31
Switching Users .............................................................................................32
Memory Security (MFC-9125CN only).................................................................32
Setting up the password ...............................................................................33
Changing your memory security password ...................................................33
Turning memory security on/off .....................................................................33
Setting Lock .........................................................................................................34
Setting up the password ................................................................................34
Changing your Setting Lock password ..........................................................34
Turning Setting Lock on/off............................................................................35
Restricting dialing ................................................................................................35
Dial pad restriction .........................................................................................35
One Touch restriction ....................................................................................35
Speed Dial restriction ....................................................................................36

Section II Fax
5

Sending a fax

How to fax............................................................................................................38
Entering fax mode .........................................................................................38
Sending a fax from the ADF ..........................................................................38
Sending a fax from the scanner glass ...........................................................38
Faxing A4 size documents from the scanner glass .......................................39
Canceling a fax in progress ...........................................................................39
Broadcasting (black & white only)........................................................................39
Canceling a Broadcast in progress................................................................40
Additional sending operations..............................................................................40
Sending faxes using multiple settings ...........................................................40
Electronic cover page (black & white only) ....................................................41
Contrast .........................................................................................................42
Changing Fax Resolution ..............................................................................42
Dual access (black & white only) ...................................................................43
Real Time Transmission ................................................................................43
Overseas Mode .............................................................................................44
Delayed Fax (black & white only) ..................................................................44
Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................44
Checking and canceling waiting jobs.............................................................45
Sending a fax manually .................................................................................45
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................45
Out of memory message ...............................................................................45

viii

Receiving a fax

Choose the correct Receive Mode ...................................................................... 46
Using receive modes ........................................................................................... 48
Fax Only ........................................................................................................ 48
Fax/Tel........................................................................................................... 48
Manual........................................................................................................... 48
External TAD ................................................................................................. 48
Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................ 49
Ring Delay ..................................................................................................... 49
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)............................................................... 49
Easy Receive................................................................................................. 50
Setting the Print Density ................................................................................ 50
Additional receiving operations............................................................................ 51
Printing a reduced incoming fax .................................................................... 51
Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only)..................................... 51
Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation................................................. 51
Printing a fax from the memory ..................................................................... 52
Receiving faxes into memory when the paper tray is empty
(black & white only) ................................................................................... 52

Telephone services and external devices

Telephone line services ....................................................................................... 53
Voice Mail ...................................................................................................... 53
Distinctive Ring.............................................................................................. 54
Caller ID ........................................................................................................ 56
Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)................................ 57
Connections................................................................................................... 58
Recording an outgoing message (OGM)....................................................... 58
Special line considerations ............................................................................ 59
Multi-line connections (PBX) ......................................................................... 60
External and extension telephones...................................................................... 60
Using external and extension telephones ..................................................... 60
For Fax/Tel mode only................................................................................... 61
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................ 61
Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................ 61
Using Remote Codes .................................................................................... 61

Dialing and storing numbers

How to dial ...........................................................................................................63
Manual dialing ...............................................................................................63
One touch dialing...........................................................................................63
Speed dialing .................................................................................................63
Search ...........................................................................................................64
Fax redial .......................................................................................................64
Storing numbers ..................................................................................................64
Storing a pause .............................................................................................64
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................65
Storing Speed Dial numbers..........................................................................66
Changing One Touch and Speed Dial numbers ............................................68
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................69
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers .............................................71
Pause ............................................................................................................71
Tone or Pulse (Canada only).........................................................................71

Remote Fax Options
(black & white only)

Fax Forwarding....................................................................................................72
Paging..................................................................................................................73
Fax Storage .........................................................................................................73
PC Fax Receive...................................................................................................74
Changing Remote Fax Options ...........................................................................75
Turning off Remote Fax Options ...................................................................75
Remote retrieval ..................................................................................................76
Setting a Remote Access Code.....................................................................76
Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................76
Retrieving fax messages ...............................................................................77
Changing the Fax Forwarding number ..........................................................77
Remote fax commands........................................................................................78

Polling

Polling receive .....................................................................................................79
Sequential polling ..........................................................................................79
Polled transmit (black & white only).....................................................................80
Setup for polled transmit................................................................................80

Printing reports

Fax reports...........................................................................................................81
Transmission verification report.....................................................................81
Fax Journal ....................................................................................................82
Reports ................................................................................................................82
How to print a report ......................................................................................83

Section III Copy
12

Making copies

How to copy ......................................................................................................... 86
Entering copy mode....................................................................................... 86
Making a single copy ..................................................................................... 86
Making multiple copies .................................................................................. 86
Stop copying.................................................................................................. 86
Copy options (temporary settings)....................................................................... 87
Enlarging or reducing the image copied ........................................................ 87
Using the Options key ................................................................................... 88
Improving copy quality................................................................................... 89
Sorting copies using the ADF ........................................................................ 89
Adjusting Contrast, Color and Brightness...................................................... 89
Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ............................................................... 91
Out of memory message ..................................................................................... 92

Section IV Direct printing
13

Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only)

Before using PictBridge ....................................................................................... 94
PictBridge requirements ................................................................................ 94
Using PictBridge .................................................................................................. 94
Setting your digital camera ............................................................................ 94
Printing images .................................................................................................... 95
DPOF printing................................................................................................ 96
Printing images with Secure Function Lock 2.0 enabled (MFC-9325CW only) ... 96
Connecting a camera as a storage device .......................................................... 98
Understanding the error messages ..................................................................... 98

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive
(MFC-9325CW only)

Supported file formats.......................................................................................... 99
Creating a PRN or PostScript® 3™ file for direct printing.................................... 99
Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only) . 100
Printing data directly from the USB flash memory drive with Secure Function
Lock 2.0 enabled (MFC-9325CW only) .......................................................... 101
Understanding the error messages ................................................................... 103

Section V Software
15

Software and Network features

106

Section VI Appendixes
A

Safety and legal

108

Compilation and Publication ..............................................................................108
Choosing a location ...........................................................................................108
To use the product safely ..................................................................................111
Important safety instructions........................................................................117
Regulation..........................................................................................................118
Standard telephone and FCC notices .........................................................118
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity
(USA only) ...............................................................................................119
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only) .............................120
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only).......................121
For use in the USA or Canada only .............................................................121
Disconnect device .......................................................................................121
LAN connection ...........................................................................................121
International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement..............................122
Trademarks........................................................................................................123
Open Source Licensing Remarks ......................................................................123
Legal limitations for copying ..............................................................................124

Options

125

Options ..............................................................................................................125
Memory board....................................................................................................126
Installing extra memory ...............................................................................126

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

128

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................128
If you are having difficulty with your machine ..............................................128
Improving the print quality ...........................................................................136
Setting Dial Tone detection .........................................................................143
Telephone line interference/VoIP ................................................................143
Error and maintenance messages.....................................................................144
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................150
Document jams............................................................................................151
Paper jams ..................................................................................................152
Routine maintenance.........................................................................................157
Cleaning the outside of the machine ...........................................................157
Cleaning the scanner...................................................................................158
Cleaning the LED heads..............................................................................159
Cleaning the corona wires ...........................................................................160
Cleaning the drum unit ................................................................................162
xii

Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers............................................................... 166
Calibration ................................................................................................... 167
Auto Registration ......................................................................................... 168
Manual Registration..................................................................................... 168
Frequency (Color Correction) ...................................................................... 168
Replacing the consumable items....................................................................... 169
Replacing a Toner cartridge ........................................................................ 171
Drum units ................................................................................................... 176
Replacing the belt unit ................................................................................. 181
Replacing the waste toner box .................................................................... 185
Replacing periodic maintenance parts............................................................... 190
Machine Information .......................................................................................... 190
Checking the Serial Number........................................................................ 190
Checking the Page Counters....................................................................... 190
Checking the remaining life of parts ............................................................ 191
Reset functions............................................................................................ 191
How to reset the machine............................................................................ 192
Packing and shipping the machine .................................................................... 192

Menu and features

197

On-screen programming.................................................................................... 197
Menu table................................................................................................... 197
Memory storage........................................................................................... 197
Menu keys ......................................................................................................... 197
How to access the menu mode ................................................................... 198
Menu table ......................................................................................................... 199
Entering text ...................................................................................................... 219

Specifications

221

General .............................................................................................................. 221
Print media......................................................................................................... 223
Fax..................................................................................................................... 224
Copy .................................................................................................................. 225
Scan .................................................................................................................. 226
Print ................................................................................................................... 227
Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 228
PictBridge (MFC-9325CW) ................................................................................ 229
Direct Print feature (MFC-9325CW) .................................................................. 230
Computer requirements .................................................................................... 231
Consumable items ............................................................................................. 232
Ethernet wired network ...................................................................................... 233
Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9325CW) ....................................................... 235
Authentication and encryption for wireless users only................................. 237
Wireless one-push configuration ................................................................. 239

Glossary

240

Index

244

xiii

xiv

Section I

General
General information
Loading paper and documents
General Setup
Security features

2
11
25
29

General information

Using the
documentation

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to
possible electrical shock.
1

Thank you for buying a Brother machine!
Reading the documentation will help you
make the most of your machine.

Symbols and conventions
used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are
used throughout the documentation.
Bold

Bold typeface identifies specific
keys on the product’s control
panel or on the computer
screen.

Italics

Italicized typeface emphasizes
an important point or refers you
to a related topic.

Courier
New

Text in Courier New font
identifies messages on the
LCD of the product.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in damage to property or loss of
product functionality.

Improper Setup icons alert you to
devices and operations that are not
compatible with the product.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to
touch product parts that are hot.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the
possibility of fire.

Notes tell you how you should
respond to a situation that may arise
or give tips about how the operation
works with other features.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked
on the product.

General information

Accessing the
Software User’s Guide
and Network User’s
Guide

This User’s Guide does not contain all the
information about the machine such as how
to use the advanced features of Fax, Printer,
Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are
ready to learn detailed information about
these operations, read the Software User’s
Guide and Network User’s Guide.

Viewing documentation
Viewing documentation (Windows®)
To view the documentation, from the Start
menu, select Brother, MFC-XXXX (where
XXXX is your model name) from the
programs group, and then choose User’s
Guides in PDF format.
If you have not installed the software, you can
find the documentation by following the
instructions below:

Turn on your PC.
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.

If the language selection screen
appears, click your language.

If the model name screen appears, click
your model name. The CD-ROM main
menu will appear.

If this window does not appear, use
Windows® Explorer to find and run the
start.exe program from the root directory
of the Brother CD-ROM.

d
e

Click Documentation.
Click the documentation you want to
read:
User’s Guide for stand-alone
operations, Software User’s Guide,
Network User’s Guide and Quick
Setup Guide.

Chapter 1

How to find scanning instructions

There are several ways you can scan
documents. You can find the instructions as
follows:

Software User’s Guide:

Viewing documentation (Macintosh)

Turn on your Macintosh.
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.

The following window will appear.

c
d

Double-click the Documentation icon.

Double-click the documentation you
want to read:
User's Guide for stand-alone
operations, Software User's Guide and
Network User's Guide.

 Scanning a document using the TWAIN
driver in Chapter 2
 Scanning a document using the WIA
driver (Windows® XP/Windows
Vista®/Windows® 7) in Chapter 2
 Using ControlCenter3 in Chapter 3
 Network Scanning in Chapter 12

ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with
OCR How-to-Guides:

 The complete ScanSoft™
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR
How-to-Guides can be viewed from the
Help selection in the ScanSoft™
PaperPort™ 11SE application.

How to find Network setup
instructions
Your machine can be connected to a wireless
or wired network. You can find basic setup
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your
wireless access point supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, follow the steps
in the Quick Setup Guide. For more
information about network setup please see
the Network User's Guide.

If the language selection screen
appears, double-click your language.

How to find scanning instructions
There are several ways you can scan
documents. You can find the instructions as
follows:

Software User’s Guide:
 Scanning in Chapter 8
 Using ControlCenter2 in Chapter 9
 Network Scanning in Chapter 12

General information

Presto! PageManager User’s Guide:

Note
Presto! PageManager is available as a
download from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/
PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg.
 The complete Presto! PageManager
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help
selection in the Presto! PageManager
application.

How to find Network setup
instructions

This Guide provides useful information about
printing JPEG and PDF files from your mobile
device and scanning from your Brother
machine to your mobile device when
connected on a WiFi network.
You can find the documentation at the
Brother Solutions Center at
http://solutions.brother.com/.

You can find all the contacts you will need,
such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center), Customer Service and Brother
Authorized Service Centers on page i and on
the Brother CD-ROM.
 Click Brother Support on the main menu.
The following screen will appear:

Your machine can be connected to a wireless
or wired network. You can find basic setup
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your
wireless access point supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, follow the steps
in the Quick Setup Guide. For more
information about network setup please see
the Network User's Guide.

Viewing the Mobile Print/Scan Guide
documentation

Accessing Brother
support (Windows®)

 To access our web site
(http://www.brother.com/) clicks
Brother Home Page.

 To view all Brother Numbers, including
Customer Service numbers for the USA
and Canada, click Support Information.
 To access the USA Brother online
shopping mall
(http://www.brothermall.com/) for
additional product and service
information, click Brother Mall.com.
 To access Canada’s Brother online
shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca/) for
additional product and services
information, click Shop Online (Canada).
 For the latest news and product support
information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
 To visit our web site for original/genuine
Brother supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.
To return to the main page, click Back.
Or, if you have finished, click Exit.
5

Chapter 1

Control panel overview

MFC-9125CN and MFC-9325CW have similar keys.

3 4

01/07 15:30 Fax
Res:Standard

3 4

01/07 15:30 Fax
Res:Standard

General information

1
3 4

01/07 15:30 Fax
Res:Standard

3 4

9
5

01/07 15:30 Fax
Res:Standard

Chapter 1

One Touch keys
These 4 keys give you instant access to 8
previously stored numbers.
Shift
Lets you access One Touch numbers 5 to 8
when held down.
Fax, Copy and Print keys
Fax keys:
Hook
Press before dialing if you want to make sure a
fax machine will answer, and then press
Black Start or Color Start. Also, press this
key after you pick up the handset of an external
telephone during the F/T ring (fast
double-rings).
Redial/Pause
Redials the last number called. It also inserts a
pause when programming quick dial numbers
or when dialing a number manually.
Resolution
Sets the resolution when sending a fax.
Copy keys:
Options
You can quickly and easily choose temporary
settings for copying.
Enlarge/Reduce
Reduces or enlarges copies.
Quality
Lets you change the quality for the next copy.

Secure
You can print data saved in the memory when
you enter your four-digit password. (For details
about using the Secure key, see the Software
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)
(MFC-9325CW) When using Secure Function
Lock, you can switch restricted users by
holding down Shift as you press Secure. (See
Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9325CW only)
on page 29.)
Job Cancel
Cancels a programmed print job and clears it
from the machine’s memory. To cancel
multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the
LCD shows Job Cancel (All).
3

Data LED
The LED will flash depending on the machine
status.

Error LED
Blinks in orange when the LCD displays an
error or an important status message.

LCD
Displays messages to help you set up and use
your machine.
(MFC-9325CW only) A four level indicator
shows the current wireless signal strength if
you are using a wireless connection.

0
Print keys:
Direct (MFC-9325CW)
Lets you print data from a USB flash memory
drive that you can connect directly to the
machine. You can also print images directly
from your PictBridge compatible camera.
(See Printing photos from a digital camera
(MFC-9325CW only) on page 94.)
Reports (MFC-9125CN)
Print the Transmission Verification Reports,
Help List, Tel Index List, Fax Journal, User
Settings and Network Config.

Max

Clear/Back
Deletes entered data or lets you cancel the
current setting.
OK
Lets you store your settings in the machine.
Volume keys:
d or c
Press to scroll backwards or forwards through
menu selections. Press to change the volume
when in fax or standby mode.
a or b
Press to scroll through the menus and options.
Address Book:
Lets you look up numbers that are stored in the
dialing memory. It also lets dial stored numbers
by pressing a three digit number.

General information

Dial pad
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax
numbers and as a keyboard for entering
information into the machine.
(Canada only) The # key temporarily switches
the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone during a
telephone call.

Stop/Exit
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.

Start:
Color
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies
in full color.
Black
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies
in black & white.

10 Mode keys:
FAX
Puts the machine in Fax mode.
SCAN
Puts the machine in Scan mode.
(For details about scanning, see the Software
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)
COPY
Puts the machine in Copy mode.
11 Menu
Lets you access the Menu to program your
settings in this machine.

Chapter 1

Data LED indications

The Data LED (light emitting diode) will flash depending on the machine’s status.

LED

Machine Status

Description

Ready Mode

The machine is ready to print, in sleep mode, there is no print
data, or the power switch is off.

Receiving Data

The machine is either receiving data from the computer,
processing data in memory, or printing data.

Data Remaining in
Memory

Print data remains in the machine memory.

Green
(blinking)

Green

Loading paper and documents

Loading paper and
print media

b
2

The machine can feed paper from the
standard paper tray.

While pressing the green paper-guide
release lever (1), slide the paper guides
to fit the paper size you are loading in
the tray. Make sure that the guides are
firmly in the slots.

When you put paper into the paper tray, note
the following:
 If your application software supports
paper size selection on the print menu,
you can select it through the software. If
your application software does not
support it, you can set the paper size in
the printer driver or by using the control
panel buttons.

Loading paper in the standard
paper tray
Printing on plain paper, thin paper or
recycled paper from the paper tray

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

1
2

Note
2

For Legal and Folio size paper, press the
release button (1) in the bottom of the
paper tray and then pull out the back of the
paper tray. (Legal or Folio size paper is
not available in some regions.)

Chapter 2

Fan the stack of paper well to avoid
paper jams and misfeeds.

Put paper in the tray, and make sure that
the paper is below the maximum paper
mark (1). The side to be printed on must
be face down.

IMPORTANT
Make sure the paper guides touch the
sides of the paper so it will feed properly.
If you do not do this, it may cause damage
to your machine.

Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine. Make sure that it is completely
inserted into the machine.

Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent
paper from sliding off the face-down
output tray or remove each page as
soon as it comes out of the machine.

Loading paper and documents

Loading paper in the manual
feed slot

Open the manual feed slot cover.

You can load envelopes and special print
media one at a time into this slot. Use the
manual feed slot to print or copy on labels,
envelopes or thicker paper.

Printing on plain paper, recycled
paper or bond paper from the manual
feed slot
Before loading, press the corners and sides
of the envelopes to make them as flat as
possible.

Note
The machine automatically turns on the
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in
the manual feed slot.

Using both hands, slide the manual feed
slot paper guides to the width of the
paper that you are going to use.

Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent
paper from sliding off the face-down
output tray or remove each page as
soon as it comes out of the machine.

Chapter 2

Using both hands, put one piece of
paper in the manual feed slot with the
print side face up until the front edge of
the paper touches the paper feed roller.
Wait until the machine automatically
feeds the paper. When you feel the
machine pull in the paper, let go.

Printing on thick paper, labels,
envelopes or small paper

When the back output tray is pulled down, the
machine has a straight paper path from the
manual feed slot through to the back of the
machine. Use this paper output method when
you want to print on thick paper, labels,
envelopes or paper that is smaller than
4.1  5.8 in. (or A6 size).

Note
• Remove each printed sheet or envelope
immediately to prevent a paper jam.
• The machine automatically turns on the
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in
the manual feed slot.

Open the back cover (back output tray).

Pull down the two gray levers, one on
the left-hand side and one on the
right-hand side, toward you as shown in
the illustration below.

Loading paper and documents

Open the manual feed slot cover.

Using both hands, put one sheet of
paper or one envelope in the manual
feed slot until the front edge of the paper
or envelope touches the paper feed
roller. When you feel the machine pull in
the paper, let go.

Using both hands, slide the manual feed
slot paper guides to the width of the
paper that you are going to use.

Chapter 2

Note
• Put the paper into the manual feed slot
with the side to be printed face up.

• You can still use the machine while the
scanner is up. To close the scanner, push
it down with both hands.

• Make sure that the print media is straight
and in the proper position on the manual
feed slot. If it is not, the paper may not be
fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout
or a paper jam.
• Do not put more than one sheet of paper
in the manual feed slot at any one time, as
it may cause a jam.
• Pull the paper out completely when you
retry putting the paper into the manual
feed.
• If you put paper or other print media in the
manual feed slot before the machine is in
the Ready mode, an error may occur and
the machine will stop printing.
• To easily remove a small printout from the
output tray, lift up the scanner by using
both hands as shown in the illustration.

• When the top cover is open, you cannot
open the scanner.

Loading paper and documents

Unprintable area

Unprintable area for faxes and copies

The figures below show unprintable areas.
2

Usage

Document Size Top (1)
Bottom (1)

Right (2)

Letter

0.16 in. (4 mm)

0.15 in. (3.95 mm)

0.16 in. (4 mm)

0.04 in. (1 mm)

Fax
Copy

Left (2)

Letter

0.16 in. (4 mm)

0.12 in. (3 mm)

Note
This unprintable area shown above is for a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy using Letter size paper.
The area that cannot be printed on will vary by paper size.

Unprintable area when printing from a computer

When using the printer driver the printable area is smaller than the paper size, as shown below.
Portrait

Landscape
2

Windows® printer driver and Macintosh printer driver
BRScript Driver for Windows® and Macintosh
1

0.16 in. (4.23 mm)

Note
The area that cannot be printed on may vary depending on the paper size and the printer driver
you are using. The unprintable area shown above is for Letter size paper.

Chapter 2

Acceptable paper and
other print media

Type and size of paper
2

Print quality may vary according to the type of
paper you are using.

For best results, follow the instructions below:
 Use paper made for plain paper copying.
 Use paper that is 20 to 24 lb
(75 to 90 g/m2).
 DO NOT put different types of paper in the
paper tray at the same time because it
may cause paper jams or misfeeds.

Item

Plain Paper

Xerox 4200DP 20 lb
Hammermill Laser Print
(24 lb=90 g/m2)

Recycled Paper

No specific brand
recommended

Labels

Avery laser labels white
#5160

Envelope

No specific brand
recommended

The name for the paper trays in the
printer driver in this Guide are as
follows:

 Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph
value, and a moisture content of
approx. 5%.

Paper Type

Since the standard paper tray is a universal
type, you can use any of the paper sizes (one
paper type and size at a time) listed in the
table in Paper capacity of the paper trays
on page 19. The standard paper tray can
hold up to 250 sheets of Letter/A4, Legal or
Folio size paper (20 lb or 80 g/m2). Paper can
be loaded up to the maximum paper mark on
the sliding paper width guide.

The manual feed slot can hold a sheet with a
size of 3 to 8.66 in. (76.2 to 220 mm) wide
and 4.57 to 16 in. (116 to 406.4 mm) long.
Use the manual feed slot if you are using
special paper, envelopes or labels.

 Avoid touching the printed surface of the
paper immediately after printing.

To get the best print quality, we suggest using
the following paper.

Manual feed slot

 For proper printing, you must choose the
same paper size from your software
application as the paper in the tray.

Recommended paper specifications

The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.
Basis weight

20-24 lb (75-90 g/m2)

Thickness

80-110 m

Roughness

Higher than 20 sec.

Stiffness

90-150 cm3/100

Grain direction

Long grain

Volume resistivity

10e9-10e11 ohm

Surface resistivity

10e9-10e12 ohm-cm

Filler

CaCO3 (Neutral)

Ash content

Below 23 wt%

Brightness

Higher than 80%

Opacity

Higher than 85%

Chapter 2

Handling and using special
paper
The machine is designed to work well with
most types of xerographic and bond paper.
However, some paper variables may have an
effect on print quality or handling reliability.
Always test samples of paper before
purchasing to ensure desirable performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep
it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.

Types of paper to avoid

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well
or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped

Some important guidelines when selecting
paper are:
 DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may
cause a paper jam or damage your
machine.

 Preprinted paper must use ink that can
withstand the temperature of the
machine’s fusing process 392 degrees
Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade).

• that is coated or has a chemical finish

 If you use bond paper, paper having a
rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or
creased, the paper may exhibit degraded
performance.

0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater curl may
cause jams to occur.

• that is damaged, creased or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight
specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• with letterheads using low temperature
dyes or thermography
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed
above, they may damage your machine.
This damage is not covered under any
Brother warranty or service agreement.

Loading paper and documents

Envelopes

Most envelopes will be suitable for your
machine. However, some envelopes may
have feed and print-quality problems
because of the way they have been made. A
suitable envelope should have edges with
straight, well-creased folds and the leading
edge should not be thicker than two sheets of
paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be
of baggy or flimsy construction. You should
buy quality envelopes from a supplier who
understands that you will be using the
envelopes in a laser machine.
Envelopes can only be fed from the Manual
feed slot. We recommend that you print a test
envelope to make sure the print results are
what you want before you print or purchase a
large quantity of envelopes.
Check the following:

Types of envelopes to avoid

IMPORTANT
DO NOT use envelopes:
• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or
an unusual shape
• that are extremely shiny or textured
• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie
strings
• with self-adhesive closures
• that are of a baggy construction
• that are not sharply creased
• that are embossed (have raised writing
on them)
• that were previously printed by a
laser/LED machine
• that are pre-printed on the inside

 Envelopes should have a lengthwise
sealing flap.
 The sealing flaps should be folded crisply
and correctly (irregularly cut or folded
envelopes may cause paper jams).
 Envelopes should consist of two layers of
paper in the area circled in the figure
below.

• that cannot be arranged neatly when
stacked
• that are made of paper that weighs
more than the paper weight
specifications for the machine
• with edges that are not straight or
consistently square
• with windows, holes, cut-outs or
perforations
• with glue on surface as shown in figure
below

1
1

Feeding direction

 Envelope joints that are sealed by the
manufacturer should be secure.
 We recommend that you do not print
within 0.6 in. (15 mm) of the edges of
envelopes.

• with double flaps as shown in figure
below

Chapter 2

• with sealing flaps that have not been
folded at purchase
• with sealing flaps as shown in figure
below

• with each side folded as shown in
figure below

If you use any of the types of envelopes
listed above, they may damage your
machine. This damage may not be
covered under any Brother warranty or
service agreement.
Occasionally you may experience paper
feed problems caused by the thickness,
size and flap shape of the envelopes you
are using.

Labels

The machine will print on most types of labels
designed for use with a laser machine. Labels
should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based
since this material is more stable at the high
temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives
should not come in contact with any part of
the machine, because the label stock may
stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause
jams and print quality problems. No adhesive
should be exposed between the labels.
Labels should be arranged so that they cover
the entire length and width of the sheet. Using
labels with spaces may result in labels
peeling off and causing serious jams or print
problems.
All labels used in this machine must be able
to withstand a temperature of 392 degrees
Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade) for a
period of 0.1 seconds.
Label sheets should not exceed the paper
weight specifications described in this User’s
Guide. Labels exceeding this specification
may not feed or print properly and may cause
damage to your machine.
Labels must be fed from the manual feed slot
only.

Types of labels to avoid
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,
wrinkled or an unusual shape.

IMPORTANT
Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet
exposed because your machine will be
damaged.

Loading paper and documents

Loading documents
Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF)

a
2

Unfold the ADF document output
support flap (1) and the ADF support
flap (2).

The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb
(80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages
before putting them in the ADF.

Recommended environment
Temperature: 68F to 86F (20C to 30C)
Humidity: 50% - 70%
Paper: Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)

b
c

Fan the pages well.

Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the
width of your document.

IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may
jam.

Place your document face up, top edge
first in the ADF until the LCD display
message changes and you feel it touch
the feed rollers.

• DO NOT use paper that is curled,
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paperclipped, pasted or taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or
fabric.

• To avoid damaging your machine while
using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the
document while it is feeding.

Note
To scan documents that are not suitable
for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass
on page 24.
 Make sure documents with correction fluid
or written with ink are completely dry.
 Documents to be faxed must be from 5.8
to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm) wide and
from 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 355.6 mm)
long, and of a standard
weight [20 lb (80 g/m2)].

Chapter 2

Using the scanner glass
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or
scan pages of a book one page at a time.
Documents can be up to 8.5 in. wide and
11.7 in. long (215.9 mm wide and 297 mm
long).

Note
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must
be empty.

a
b

Lift the document cover.
Using the document guidelines on the
left and top, place the document face
down in the upper left corner of the
scanner glass.

Close the document cover.

IMPORTANT
If the document is a book or is thick do not
slam the cover or press on it.

General Setup

Mode Timer

Paper settings

The machine has three mode keys on the
control panel: FAX, SCAN, and COPY.

Paper Type

You can set how much time the machine
takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to
return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the
machine will stay in the mode you used last.

Set up the machine for the type of paper you
are using. This will give you the best print
quality.

This setting also sets the time the machine
will change from individual user to the Public
mode when using Secure Function Lock.
(See Switching Users on page 32.)

Press Menu, 1, 1.
General Setup
1.Mode Timer

Press a or b to choose 0 Sec,
30 Secs, 1 Min, 2 Mins, 5 Mins or
Off.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 1, 2, 1.
Paper
1.Paper Type

Press a or b to choose Thin, Plain,
Thick, Thicker or
Recycled Paper.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Paper Size

You can use ten sizes of paper for printing
copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive, A5,
A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio and four sizes for
printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or
Folio (8.5"13").
When you change the size of paper in the
tray, you will also need to change the setting
for paper size at the same time so your
machine can fit the document or an incoming
fax on the page.

Press Menu, 1, 2, 2.
Paper
2.Paper Size

Press a or b to choose A4, Letter,
Legal, Executive, A5, A5 L, A6, B5,
B6 or Folio.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 3

Volume settings
Ring volume

You can also change the ring volume through
the menu:

Volume
1.Ring

Press Stop/Exit.

Beeper volume
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep
when you press a key, make a mistake, or
after you send or receive a fax. You can
choose a range of volume levels, from High
to Off.

Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.
Volume
2.Beeper

Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or
High.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or
High.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can also adjust the speaker volume with
the control panel keys.

Press Menu, 1, 3, 1.

Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or
High.
Press OK.

Press Menu, 1, 3, 3.
Volume
3.Speaker

While in Fax mode press
or
to adjust
the volume level. The LCD will show the
current setting, and each key press will
change the volume to the next level. The
machine will keep the new setting until you
change it.

You can choose a range of speaker volume
levels, from High to Off.

You can choose a ring volume level from a
range of settings, from High to Off.

Speaker volume

Press

Press Hook.

Press
or .
This setting will stay until you change it
again.

Press Hook.

(FAX).

General Setup

Automatic daylight
savings time

Ecology features
3

Toner Save

You can set the machine to change
automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It
will set itself forward one hour in the Spring,
and back one hour in the Fall.

You can save toner using this feature. When
you set Toner Save to On, print appears
lighter. The default setting is Off.

Press Menu, 1, 4.

Press Menu, 1, 5, 1.
Ecology
1.Toner Save

General Setup
4.Auto Daylight

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
We do not recommend Toner Save for
printing Photo or Gray Scale images.

Sleep Time

The Sleep Time setting can reduce power
consumption by turning off the fuser while the
machine is idle.
You can choose how long the machine must
be idle before it goes into sleep mode. When
the machine receives a fax, computer data, or
makes a copy, the timer will be reset. The
default setting is 005 minutes.
While the machine is in sleep mode the LCD
will display Sleep. When printing or copying
in sleep mode, there will be a short delay
while the fuser warms up.

Press Menu, 1, 5, 2.
Ecology
2.Sleep Time

Enter the length of time the machine is
idle before entering sleep mode.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 3

LCD Contrast
You can change the contrast to make the
LCD look lighter or darker.

Press Menu, 1, 6.
General Setup
6.LCD Contrast

b
c

Press a to make the LCD darker. Or,
press b to make the LCD lighter.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Dial Prefix

The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a
predefined number before every fax number
you dial. For example: If your telephone
system requires a 9 to dial an outside number
use this setting to automatically dial 9 for
every fax you send.

Setting up the prefix number

(USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.

Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)
on the dial pad.
Press OK.

Note
• You can use the numbers 0 to 9, #, l
and !. (Press Hook to display “!”.)
You cannot use ! with any other numbers
or characters.
If your telephone system requires a timed
break recall (hookflash), press Hook to
enter the break.
• (Canada only) If the pulse dialing mode is
on, # and l are not available to use.

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing the prefix number

(USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.

Do one of the following:
 To change the prefix number,
press 1.
 To exit without making a change,
press 2. Go to step d.

Enter a new prefix number using the dial
pad (up to 5 digits), press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Security features

Secure Function Lock
2.0 (MFC-9325CW only)

Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public
access to the following machine functions:
 Fax Tx
 Fax Rx
 Copy
 Scan
 USB Direct
 PC Print
 Color Print
This feature also prevents users from
changing the Default settings of the machine
by limiting access to the Menu settings.
Before using the security features you must
first enter an administrator password.
Access to restricted operations can be
enabled by creating a restricted user.
Restricted users must enter a user password
to use the machine.
Make a careful note of your password. If you
forget it, you will have to reset the password
stored in the machine. For information about
how to reset the password call Brother
Customer Service.

Note
• Secure Function Lock can be set manually
at the control panel or by using Web
Based Management. We recommend
using Web Based Management to
configure this feature. For more
information, see the Network User’s
Guide on the CD-ROM.

• Only administrators can set limitations
and make changes for each user.
• When Secure Function Lock is on, you
can only use 1.Contrast,
6.Polled TX and 7.Coverpg Setup
under 2.Setup Send in the Fax menu.
If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any
function in the Fax menu.
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.

Setting the password for the
administrator

The password you set in these steps is for the
administrator. This password is used to set
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on
or off. (See Setting up restricted users
on page 31 and Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off on page 31.)

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Enter a four-digit number for the
password using numbers 0-9.
Press OK.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify:.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 4

Changing the password for
the administrator

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Press a or b to choose Set Password.
Press OK.

Enter the registered four-digit password.
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit number for the new
password.
Press OK.

e
f

If the LCD shows Verify: re-enter the
new password.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Setting up the public user
mode
Public user mode restricts the functions that
are available for Public users. Public users do
not need to enter a password to access the
features made available through this setting.
You can set up one Public user.

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Press a or b to choose Setup ID.
Press OK.

Enter the administrator password.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose Public.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose On or Off for
Fax Tx.
Press OK.
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,
USB Direct, PC Print and
Color Print. When the LCD shows
Exit, press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Security features

Setting up restricted users

You can set up users with restrictions and a
password for functions that are available to
them. You can set up more advanced
restrictions, such as by page count or PC
user login name, through Web Based
Management. (For more information, see the
Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.) You
can set up to 25 restricted users with
restrictions and a password.

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Press a or b to choose Setup ID.
Press OK.

Enter the administrator password.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose User01.
Press OK.

Use the numeric keys to enter the user
name. (See Entering text on page 219.)
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit password for the user.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose On or Off for
Fax Tx.
Press OK.
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,
USB Direct, PC Print and
Color Print. When the LCD shows
Exit, press OK.

Repeat steps d to g for entering each
additional user and password.

Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off

If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the
correct password.
Turning Secure Function Lock on

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Press a or b to choose Lock OffiOn.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit administrator
password.
Press OK.

Turning Secure Function Lock off

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Function Lock

Press a or b to choose Lock OniOff.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit administrator
password.
Press OK.

Note
You cannot use the same name as
another user’s name.

Chapter 4

Switching Users
This setting allows you to switch between
registered restricted users or Public mode
when Secure Function Lock is turned on.
Changing to the restricted user Mode

Hold down Shift as you press Secure.
Change ID
user 1

Press a or b to choose your name.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit password.
Press OK.

Note
If you press a Mode key that is restricted,
Access Denied will appear on the LCD
and then the machine will ask your name.
If you are a restricted user with access to
this Mode, press a or b to choose your
name and enter your four-digit password.

Memory Security
(MFC-9125CN only)
Memory Security lets you prevent
unauthorized access to the machine.
While Memory Security is on, the following
operations are available:
 Receiving faxes into memory (limited by
memory capacity)
 Fax Forwarding (if Fax Forwarding was
already on)
 Paging (if Paging was already on)
 Remote Retrieval (if Fax Storage was
already on)
While Memory Security is on, the following
operations are NOT available:
 Printing received faxes
 Sending faxes
 Copying
 PC printing

Changing to the Public Mode

 Scanning

After a restricted user has finished using the
machine, it will return to the Public setting
within the same time as the Mode Timer
setting (Menu, 1, 1). (See Mode Timer
on page 25.) You can also exit from the
restricted user mode by pressing the current
Mode key you are in. Then LCD will ask you
Go to Public?.

 PC Fax Receive

Press 1 to choose 1. Yes.

Note
• To print the faxes in memory, turn off
Memory Security.
• You must turn off PC Fax Receive before
you can turn on Memory Security. (See
Turning off Remote Fax Options
on page 75.)

Security features

Setting up the password

Note

• If you forget the Memory Security
password, please call Brother Customer
Service (See Brother numbers
on page i.).

Turning memory security on

Enter a four-digit number for the
password using numbers 0-9.
Press OK.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify:.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing your memory
security password

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security
1.Mem Security

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Mem Security

If you enter the wrong password when
following the instructions below, the LCD will
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the
correct password.

• If you have already set the password, you
will not need to set it, again.

Turning memory security
on/off

Press a or b to choose Set Security.
Press OK.

Enter your registered four-digit
password.
Press OK.
The machine goes offline and the LCD
shows Secure Mode.

Note
If there is a power failure the data will stay
in memory for up to 60 hours.
4

Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.
Security
1.Mem Security

Press a or b to choose Set Password.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit password.
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit number for the new
password.
Press OK.

Re-enter the password when the LCD
shows Verify:.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Turning memory security off

Press Menu.
Enter the registered four-digit password.
Press OK.

Memory Security is automatically turned
off and the LCD shows the date and
time.

Note
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD
shows Wrong Password and stays
offline. The machine will stay in Secure
Mode until the registered password is
entered.

Chapter 4

Setting Lock
Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop
other people from accidentally changing your
machine settings.
Make a careful note of your password. If you
forget it, you will have to reset the passwords
stored in the machine. Please call your
administrator or Brother Customer Service.
While Setting Lock is On, you cannot change
the following settings without a password:

Setting up the password

 Quick Dial settings
 Mode Timer
 Paper Type
 Paper Size
 Volume

Enter a four-digit number for the
password using numbers 0-9.
Press OK.

Re-enter your password when the LCD
shows Verify:.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing your Setting Lock
password

Press a or b to choose Set Password.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit password.
Press OK.

Enter a four-digit number for the new
password.
Press OK.

Re-enter your new password when the
LCD shows Verify:.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

 Secure Function Lock (MFC-9325CW)
 Memory Security (MFC-9125CN)
 Dial Restriction

Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.

 LCD Contrast
 Setting Lock

Security
2.Setting Lock

 Auto Daylight
 Ecology

Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.
Security
2.Setting Lock

 Date/Time
 Station ID

Security features

Turning Setting Lock on/off

Restricting dialing

If you enter the wrong password when
following the instructions below, the LCD will
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the
correct password.

This feature is to prevent users from sending
a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.
You can set the machine to restrict dialing by
using the dial pad, One Touch or Speed Dial.

Turning Setting Lock on

If you choose Off, the machine does not
restrict any dialing method.

Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.
Security
2.Setting Lock

Press a or b to choose On.
Press OK.

Enter your four-digit password.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

If you choose Enter # twice, the machine
will prompt you to re-enter the number, and
then if you re-enter the same number
correctly, the machine will start dialing. If you
re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will
show an error message.
If you choose On, the machine will restrict all
fax sending and outbound calls.

Turning Setting Lock off

Dial pad restriction

Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.
Security
2.Setting Lock

Enter your four-digit password.
Press OK twice.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 2, 6, 1.
Dial Restrict.
1.Dial Pad

Press a or b to choose Off,
Enter # twice or On.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

One Touch restriction

Press Menu, 2, 6, 2.
Dial Restrict.
2.One Touch Dial

Press a or b to choose Off,
Enter # twice or On.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 4

Speed Dial restriction

Press Menu, 2, 6, 3.
Dial Restrict.
3.Speed Dial

Press a or b to choose Off,
Enter # twice or On.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• The Enter # twice setting will not work
if you use an external phone or press
Hook before entering the number. You will
not be asked to re-enter the number.
• You can not restrict dialing when you use
Redial/Pause.
• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you
can not use the Broadcasting feature and
can not combine quick dial numbers when
dialing.

Section II

Fax
Sending a fax
Receiving a fax
Telephone services and external devices
Dialing and storing numbers
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)
Polling
Printing reports

38
46
53
63
72
79
81

Sending a fax

How to fax

Entering fax mode
To enter fax mode press
key will glow blue.

(FAX), and the

Sending a fax from the ADF

Using the ADF to send your faxes is the
easiest way. To cancel a fax in progress
press Stop/Exit.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Place your document face up, top edge
first in the ADF until the LCD display
changes and you feel it touch the rollers.

c
d

Sending a fax from the
scanner glass
You can use the scanner glass to fax the
pages of a book, or a single page at a time.
The documents can be up to Letter or A4
size. Press Stop/Exit to cancel a fax in
progress.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Place your document face down on the
scanner glass.

Dial the fax number. (See How to dial
on page 63.)

Press Black Start or Color Start.

 If you press Color Start, the
machine starts sending. Go to
step g.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

 If you press Color Start, the
machine starts dialing and sends the
document in real time.

After the machine scans the page, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of
the options below:
Next Page?
1.Yes 2.No(Send)
 Press 1 to send another page. Go to
step f.

Note
If an Out of Memory message appears
while scanning a document into memory,
press Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start
to send the scanned pages.

 Press 2 or Black Start to send the
document. Go to step g.

Place the next page on the scanner
glass, press OK. Repeat steps e and f
for each additional page.
Set Next Page
Then Press OK

 If you press Black Start, the
machine starts scanning the first
page. Go to step e.

Dial the fax number. (See How to dial
on page 63.)

 If you press Black Start, the
machine scans the pages into
memory and then sends the
document.

Sending a fax

Broadcasting
(black & white only)

Your machine will automatically send
the fax.

Note

Broadcasting lets you send the same fax
message to more than one fax number. You
can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial
numbers and up to 50 manually dialed
numbers in the same broadcast.

When faxing multiple pages from the
scanner glass, real time transmission
should be set to Off. (See Real Time
Transmission on page 43.)

Faxing A4 size documents
from the scanner glass

When faxing A4 size documents, you will
need to set the scan glass size to A4;
otherwise, a portion of your faxes will be
missing.

You can broadcast up to 258 different
numbers. This will depend on how many
groups, access codes or credit card numbers
you have stored, and on how many delayed
or stored faxes in memory.

Note
Use
(Address Book) to help you
choose numbers easily.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Document Scan
1.Glass ScanSize

b
c

Load your document.

Repeat step c until you have entered
all the fax numbers you want to
broadcast to.

Press Black Start.

Press a or b to choose A4.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Canceling a fax in progress
Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you
press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing
or sending, the LCD will show
1.Clear 2.Exit, press 1 to cancel the
fax.

Enter a number.
Press OK.
You can use either a One Touch,
Speed Dial, a Group number, or a
number manually entered using the dial
pad. (See How to dial on page 63.)

After the broadcast is finished the machine
will print a broadcast report to let you know
the results.

Note
The scan profile of the One Touch,
Speed Dial or Group number you chose
first will be applied to the broadcast.

Chapter 5

Canceling a Broadcast in
progress

Press Menu, 2, 7.
The LCD will show the Broadcast job
number followed by the fax number (or
name) being dialed (for example, #001
0123456789).
Press OK.
The LCD will show the following
message:
#001 0123456789
1.Clear 2.Exit

Sending faxes using multiple
settings
Before you send a fax, you can change any
combination of these settings: contrast,
resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer,
polling transmission, real time transmission
or cover page settings.

Press 1 to cancel the fax number being
dialed.
The LCD will then show the following
message:
Broadcast #001
1.Clear 2.Exit

d
e

Additional sending
operations

To cancel the Broadcast, press 1.
Press Stop/Exit.

Make sure you are in Fax mode
.
After each setting is accepted, the LCD
asks if you want to enter more settings:
Other Settings
1.Yes 2.No

Do one of the following:
 To choose more settings, press 1.
The LCD returns to the Setup Send
menu so you can choose another
setting.
 If you have finished choosing
settings, press 2 and go to the next
step for sending your fax.

Sending a fax

Electronic cover page
(black & white only)
This feature will not work unless you have
already programmed your Station ID. (See
the Quick Setup Guide.)
You can automatically send a cover page
with every fax. Your cover page includes your
Station ID, a comment, and the name (or
number) stored in the One Touch or Speed
Dial memory.
By choosing Next Fax:On you can also
display the number of pages on the cover
page.
You can choose one of the following preset
comments.
1.Comment Off
2.Please Call
3.Urgent
4.Confidential
Instead of using one of the preset comments,
you can enter two personal messages of your
own, up to 26 characters long. Use the chart
on page 219 for help entering characters.
(See Composing your own comments
on page 41.)
5.(User Defined)

Composing your own comments
5

You can set up two comments of your own.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 8.

Setup Send
8.Coverpage Msg

Press a or b to choose 5 or 6 to store
your own comment.
Press OK.

Enter your own comment using the dial
pad.
Press OK.

Use the chart on page 219 for help entering
characters.

Send a cover page for the next fax

If you want to send a cover page only for the
next fax, your machine will ask you to enter
the number of pages you are sending so it
can be printed on the cover page.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

b
c

Load your document.

6.(User Defined)

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.
Setup Send
7.Coverpg Setup

Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On
(or Next Fax:Off).
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose a comment.
Press OK.

Enter two digits to show the number of
pages you are sending.
Press OK.
For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or
0, 0 to leave the number of pages blank.
If you make a mistake, press d or
Clear/Back to back up and re-enter the
number of pages.
41

Chapter 5

Send a cover page for all faxes

You can set the machine to send a cover
page whenever you send a fax.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.

Press a or b to choose On (or Off).
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose a comment.
Press OK.

If your document is very light or dark,
changing the contrast may improve the
quality of the fax.
Use Dark to make the faxed document
lighter.
Use Light to make the faxed document
darker.

Using a printed cover page

If you want to use a printed cover page that
you can write on, you can print the sample
page and attach it to your fax.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.

For most documents the default setting of
Auto will give the best results. It
automatically chooses the suitable contrast
for your document.

Setup Send
7.Coverpg Setup

Contrast

Make sure you are in Fax mode

b
c

Load your document.

Press a or b to choose Print Sample.
Press OK.

d
e

Press Start.
After the machine prints a copy of your
cover page, press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 1.
Setup Send
1.Contrast

Setup Send
7.Coverpg Setup

Press a or b to choose Auto, Light or
Dark.
Press OK.

Note
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the
machine will send the fax using the Auto
setting if you choose Photo as the Fax
Resolution.

Changing Fax Resolution

The quality of a fax can be improved by
changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can
be changed for the next fax or for all faxes.

To change the Fax Resolution setting
for the next fax

Make sure you are in Fax mode

b
c

Load your document.

Press Resolution, then a or b to choose
the resolution.
Press OK.

Sending a fax

To change the default Fax Resolution
setting

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 2.

Setup Send
2.Fax Resolution

Press a or b to choose the resolution
you want.
Press OK.

Note
You can choose four different resolution
settings for black & white faxes and two for
color.
Black & white:
Standard: Suitable for most typed
documents.
Fine: Good for small print and transmits a
little slower than Standard resolution.
S.Fine: Good for small print or artwork
and transmits slower than Fine
resolution.
Photo: Use when the document has
varying shades of gray or is a photograph.
This has the slowest transmission time.
Color:
Standard: Suitable for most typed
documents.
Fine: Use when the document is a
photograph. The transmission time is
slower than Standard resolution.
If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then
use the Color Start key to send a fax, the
machine will send the fax using the Fine
setting.

Dual access
(black & white only)

You can dial a number, and start scanning the
fax into memory—even when the machine is
sending from memory, receiving faxes or
printing PC data. The LCD will show the new
job number.
The number of pages you can scan into the
memory will vary depending on the data that
is printed on them.

Note

If you get an Out of Memory message
while scanning the first page of a fax,
press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you
get an Out of Memory message while
scanning a subsequent page, you can
press Black Start to send the pages
scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to
cancel the operation.

Real Time Transmission

When you are sending a fax, the machine will
scan the documents into the memory before
sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone
line is free, the machine will start dialing and
sending.
Sometimes, you may want to send an
important document immediately, without
waiting for memory transmission. You can set
Real Time TX to On for all documents or
Next Fax:On for the next fax only.

Note
• If the memory is full and you are sending a
black and white fax from the ADF, the
machine will send the document in real
time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off). If
the memory is full, faxes from the scanner
glass cannot be sent until you clear some
of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic
redial feature does not work when using
the scanner glass.
43

Chapter 5

Sending in real time for all faxes

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.

Press a or b to choose On.
Press OK.

Sending in real time for the next fax
only

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

b
c

Load your document.

Overseas Mode

Load your document.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 9.
Setup Send
9.Overseas Mode

The number of pages you can scan into
the memory depends on the amount of
data printed on each page.

Delayed batch transmission
(black & white only)

This is a temporary setting, and will only be
active for your next fax.

b
c

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Enter the time you want the fax to be
sent (in 24-hour format).
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM)
Press OK.

If you are having difficulty sending a fax
overseas due to a bad connection, then
turning on Overseas Mode may help.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 3.

Note

Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On.
Press OK.

Setup Send
3.Delayed Fax

Setup Send
5.Real Time TX

You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory
to be sent within a twenty four hour period.

Setup Send
5.Real Time TX

Delayed Fax
(black & white only)

Before sending the delayed faxes, your
machine will help you economize by sorting
all the faxes in the memory by destination and
scheduled time.
All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be
sent at the same time to the same fax number
will be sent as one fax to save transmission
time.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 2, 4.
Setup Send
4.Batch TX

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Checking and canceling
waiting jobs

Check which jobs are still waiting in the
memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the
LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can
cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in
the memory.

a
b

Press Menu, 2, 7.
The number of jobs still to be sent will be
displayed.
Do one of the following:

Load your document.

d
e

Dial the fax number you want to call.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Load your document.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Replace the handset of an external
telephone.

Out of memory message

Manual transmission lets you hear the
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while
sending a fax.

b
c

b
c
d

Manual transmission

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Ask the other party to wait for fax tones
(beeps) and then to press the Start or
Send key before hanging up.

When you have finished, press
Stop/Exit.

 If you are using the scanner glass,
press 1 to send a fax.

 Press 2 to exit without canceling.

Sending a fax manually

At the end of a conversation you can send a
fax to the other party before you both hang
up.

 Press a or b to scroll though the
waiting jobs, press OK to choose a
job, and then press 1 to cancel it.

Sending a fax at the end of a
conversation

Press Hook and listen for a dial tone.
Or pick up the handset of the external
telephone and listen for a dial tone.

If you get an Out of Memory message
while scanning the first page of a fax, press
Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.
If you get an Out of Memory message
while scanning a subsequent page, you will
have the option to press Black Start to send
the pages scanned so far, or to press
Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

Note
If you get an Out of Memory message
while faxing and you do not want to delete
your stored faxes to clear the memory,
you can send the fax in real time. (See
Real Time Transmission on page 43.)

When you hear the fax tone, press
Black Start or Color Start.
 If you are using the scanner glass,
press 1 to send a fax.

Replace the handset of an external
telephone.

Receiving a fax

Choose the correct Receive Mode
The correct Receive Mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the
Brother machine.
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this
service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,
Data Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring
on page 54 for instructions on setting up your machine using this feature.)
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility
that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls. (See
Voice Mail on page 53 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother
machine?
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your receive mode.
(See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 57.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your receive mode. (See
Fax Only on page 48.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?
The Fax/Tel receive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the
same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your receive mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 48.)
Important Note: You can not receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering
machine when choosing the Fax/Tel mode.
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?
Choose Manual as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call
yourself. (See Manual on page 48.)

Receiving a fax

To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:

Press Menu, 0, 1.
Initial Setup
1.Receive Mode

Press a or b to choose the receive mode.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

The LCD will display the current receive mode.

Chapter 6

Using receive modes

External TAD
External TAD mode lets an external
answering device manage your incoming
calls. Incoming calls will be handled in the
following ways:

Some receive modes answer automatically
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to
change the Ring Delay before using these
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 49.)

 Faxes will be automatically received.

Fax Only

Fax Only mode will automatically answer
every call as a fax.

Fax/Tel

(For more information see Connecting an
external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 57.)
6

Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically
manage incoming calls, by recognizing
whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in one of the following ways:
 Faxes will be automatically received.
 Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you
to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast
double ring made by your machine.
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 49 and Ring Delay on page 49.)

Manual
Manual mode turns off all automatic
answering functions unless you are using the
Distinctive Ring Receive feature.
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the
handset of the external telephone or press
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short
repeating beeps), press Black Start, and
then press 2 to receive a fax. You can also
use the Easy Receive feature to receive
faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as
the machine.
(Also see Easy Receive on page 50.)

 Voice callers can record a message on the
external TAD.

Receiving a fax

Receive Mode settings
Ring Delay

The Ring Delay setting sets the number of
times the machine rings before it answers in
Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.
If you have external or extension telephones
on the same line as the machine, keep the
Ring Delay setting of 4. (See Easy Receive
on page 50.)

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 1.

Setup Receive
1.Ring Delay

Press a or b to choose 00, 01, 02, 03 or
04 for how many times the line rings
before the machine answers.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
Choose 00 in step c to have the machine
answer immediately.

F/T Ring Time
(Fax/Tel mode only)

When somebody calls your machine, you and
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring
sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring
Delay setting.
If the call is a fax, then your machine will
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the
machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast
double-ring) for the time you have set in the
F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring
it means that you have a voice caller on the
line.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,
extension and external telephones will not
ring; however, you can still answer the call on
any telephone. (For more information see
Using Remote Codes on page 61.)

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 2.

Setup Receive
2.F/T Ring Time

Press a or b to choose how long the
machine will ring to alert you that you
have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or
70 seconds).
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 6

Easy Receive

If Easy Receive is On:

The machine can receive a fax automatically,
even if you answer the call. When you see
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the
phone line through the handset you are
using, just replace the handset. Your
machine will do the rest.

If Easy Receive is Off:

Note
• If this feature is set to On, but your
machine does not connect a fax call when
you lift an extension telephone handset,
press the fax receive code l51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the
same telephone line and the machine
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.
Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 3.
Setup Receive
3.Easy Receive

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.

Press a to make the print darker.
Or, press b to make the print lighter.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

If you answered at an extension telephone
press l51.

You can adjust the Print Density setting to
make your printed pages darker or lighter.

Setup Receive
6.Print Density

If you are at the machine and answer a fax
call first by lifting the external handset, then
press Black Start or Color Start, and then
press 2 to receive.

Setting the Print Density

Receiving a fax

Additional receiving
operations

Setting the Fax Receive
Stamp (black & white only)

Printing a reduced incoming
fax
If you choose On, the machine automatically
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on
one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size
paper.

You can set the machine to print the received
date and time in the top center of each
received fax page.
6

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 2, 1, 5.

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Setup Receive
8.Fax Rx Stamp

The machine calculates the reduction ratio by
using the page size of the fax and your Paper
Size setting (Menu, 1, 2, 2).

Setup Receive
5.Auto Reduction

Note
• The received time and date will not appear
when using Internet Fax.
• Make sure you have set the current date
and time in the machine. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)

Receiving a fax at the end of a
conversation

At the end of a conversation you can ask the
other party to send you a fax before you both
hang up.

Ask the other party to place the
document in their machine and to press
the Start or Send key.

When you hear the CNG tones (slowly
repeating beeps), press Black Start or
Color Start.

c
d

Press 2 to receive a fax.
Replace the external handset.

Chapter 6

Printing a fax from the
memory

If you are using the Fax Storage feature
(Menu, 2, 5, 1), you can still print a fax from
the memory when you are at your machine.
(See Fax Storage on page 73.)

Press Menu, 2, 5, 3.
Remote Fax Opt
3.Print Fax

b
c

Press Start.
Press Stop/Exit.

Receiving faxes into memory
when the paper tray is empty
(black & white only)
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty
during fax reception, the LCD shows
No Paper and begins receiving faxes into
the machine’s memory. Put some paper in
the paper tray. (See Loading paper and print
media on page 11.)
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,
with the remaining pages being stored in
memory, if enough memory is available.
Further incoming faxes will also be stored into
memory until the memory is full. When the
memory is full the machine will stop
automatically answering calls. To print the
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray and press
Black Start or Color Start.

Telephone services and external
devices

Telephone line
services
Voice Mail
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and
the Brother machine will conflict with each
other when receiving incoming calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Brother
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then
your Brother machine will answer first. This
will prevent callers from being able to leave a
message in your Voice Mail.
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother
machine from being able to receive an
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother
machine.

To avoid conflicts between your Brother
machine and your Voice Mail service, do one
of the following:
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a
feature of your Brother machine that allows a
person with one line to receive fax and voice
calls through two different telephone
numbers on that one line. Brother uses the
term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone
companies market the service under a variety
of names, such as Custom Ringing,
Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, RingMaster,
Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call,
Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate
Number Ringing. This service establishes a
second telephone number on the same line
as your existing telephone number, and each
number has its own ring pattern. Typically,
the original number rings with the standard
ring pattern and is used for receiving voice
calls, and the second number rings with a
different ring pattern and is used for receiving
faxes. (See Distinctive Ring on page 54.)
OR
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to
"Manual". Manual Mode requires that you
answer every incoming call if you want to be
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a
telephone call, then complete the call as you
normally would. If you hear fax sending tones
you must transfer the call to the Brother
machine. (See Using external and extension
telephones on page 60.) Unanswered fax
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To
set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see
Choose the correct Receive Mode
on page 46.)

Chapter 7

Distinctive Ring

Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother
machine that allows a person with one line to
receive fax and voice calls through two
different phone numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring," but
telephone companies market the service
under a variety of names, such as Smart
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This
service establishes a second telephone
number on the same line as your existing
telephone number, and each number has its
own ring pattern. Typically, the original
number rings with the standard ring pattern
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the
second number rings with a different ring
pattern and is used for receiving faxes.

Note
You must pay for your telephone
company’s Distinctive Ring service before
you program the machine to work with it.

Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line
that you will install your new machine on,
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail
and the machine will conflict with each other
while receiving incoming calls. However, the
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use
more than one number on your line, so
both Voice Mail and the machine can work
together without any problems. If each one
has a separate telephone number, neither will
interfere with the other’s operations.

Note

• Please call your telephone company for
availability and rates.

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring
service allows you to have more than one
number on the same telephone line. If you
need more than one telephone number, it
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.
Each telephone number has its own
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know
which telephone number is ringing. This is
one way you can have a separate telephone
number for your machine.

Note
Please call your telephone company for
availability and rates.

The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring
feature that allows you to use your machine to
take full advantage of the telephone
company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new
telephone number on your line can just
receive faxes.

• You must pay for your telephone
company's Distinctive Ring service before
you program the machine to work with it.

What does your telephone company’s
‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

What does Brother’s ‘distinctive ring’
do?

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring
service from the telephone company, you will
need to follow the directions below to
‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern
they give you. This is so your machine can
recognize its incoming calls.

Note
You can change or cancel the Distinctive
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.
When you get a new fax number, make
sure you reset this feature.

Telephone services and external devices

Before you choose the ring pattern to
register
You can only register one Distinctive Ring
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below
are supported by your Brother machine.
Register the one your telephone company
gives you.
Ring
Pattern

Rings

long-long

short-long-short

short-short-long

very long
(normal pattern)

Note
• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short
and is the most commonly used.
• If the ring pattern you received is not on
this chart, please call your telephone
company and ask for one that is
shown.
 The machine will only answer calls to its
registered number.
 The first two rings are silent on the
machine. This is because the fax must
<> to the ring pattern (to compare
it to the pattern that was ‘registered’).
(Other telephones on the same line will
ring.)

Registering the distinctive ring pattern
Very important!

After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will
receive faxes automatically. The receive
mode is automatically set to Manual and you
cannot change it to another receive mode
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This
ensures the Brother machine will only answer
the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere
when your main telephone number is called.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.
Miscellaneous
2.Distinctive

b
c
d

Press a or b to choose Set.
Press OK.
Press a or b to choose the prestored ring
pattern you want to use.
Press OK.

(You will hear each pattern as you scroll
through the four patterns. Make sure
you choose the pattern that the
telephone company gave you.)

Press Stop/Exit.
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.

 If you program the machine properly, it will
recognize the registered ring pattern of the
‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and
then answer with a fax tone. When the
‘voice number’ is called, the machine will
not answer.

Chapter 7

Turning off distinctive ring

Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.
Miscellaneous
2.Distinctive

Press a or b to choose Off.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
If you do not want to receive faxes on your
Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off
Distinctive Ring. The machine will stay in
Manual receive mode so you will need to
set the Receive Mode again. (See Choose
the correct Receive Mode on page 46.)

Caller ID
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller
ID subscriber service offered by many local
telephone companies. Call your telephone
company for details. This service shows the
telephone number, or name if it is available,
of your caller as the line rings.
After a few rings, the LCD will show the
telephone number of your caller (and name, if
available). Once you answer a call, the Caller
ID information disappears from the LCD, but
the call information stays stored in the Caller
ID memory.
 You will see the first 16 characters of the
number (or name).
 The # Unavailable message means
the call originated outside your Caller ID
service area.
 The Private Call message means the
caller has intentionally blocked
transmission of information.
You can print a list of the Caller ID information
received by your machine. (See Printing the
Caller ID List on page 57.)

Note
Caller ID service varies with different
carriers. Call your local telephone
company to find out about the kind of
service available in your area.

Telephone services and external devices

Viewing the Caller ID List

Your machine stores information for the last
thirty calls in the Caller ID list. You can view
or print this list. When the thirty-first call
comes in to the machine, it replaces
information about the first call.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.

Press a or b to choose Display#.
Press OK.
The Caller ID of the last call will appear
on the display. If no ID is stored, the
beeper will sound and No Caller ID
will appear on the display.

Press a or b to scroll through the Caller
ID memory to choose the Caller ID you
want to view, and then press OK.
The LCD will show the caller's number
or name and the date and time of the
call.

To finish viewing, press Stop/Exit.

Printing the Caller ID List

The external TAD must answer within four
rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).
This is because your machine cannot hear
the CNG tones until the external TAD has
picked up the call. The sending machine will
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds
longer. We do not recommend using the toll
saver feature on your external TAD if it needs
more than four rings to activate it.
Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the
TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of
the machine.
7

Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.
Miscellaneous
3.Caller ID

c
d

Before you connect an external TAD
(telephone answering device), remove the
protective cap (2) from the EXT. jack on the
machine.

Press a or b to choose Print Report.
Press OK.
If no ID is stored, the beeper will sound
and No Caller ID will appear on the
LCD.

Press Black Start or Color Start.
After printing has finished,
press Stop/Exit.

You can connect an external Telephone
Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as
your machine. When the TAD answers a call,
your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax
calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.
If it hears them it will take over the call and
receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will
let your TAD take a voice message and the
display will show Telephone.

Miscellaneous
3.Caller ID

Connecting an external
TAD (telephone
answering device)

2
1

TAD

Protective Cap

Note
If you have problems receiving faxes,
reduce the ring delay setting on your
external TAD.
57

Chapter 7

Connections
The external TAD must be plugged into the
back of the machine, into the jack labeled
EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if
you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you
are using Distinctive Ring).

a
b

Plug the telephone line cord from the
telephone wall jack into the back of the
machine, in the jack labeled LINE.
Plug the telephone line cord from your
external TAD into the back of the
machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make
sure this cord is connected to the TAD at
the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not
its handset jack.)

Set your external TAD to four rings or
less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting
does not apply.)

Record the outgoing message on your
external TAD.

e
f

Set the TAD to answer calls.

Set the Receive Mode to
External TAD. (See Choose the
correct Receive Mode on page 46.)

Recording an outgoing
message (OGM)

Record 5 seconds of silence at the
beginning of your message. This allows
your machine time to listen for fax tones.

b
c

Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
End your 20-second message by giving
your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Note
We recommend beginning your OGM with
an initial 5 second silence because the
machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud
voice. You may try leaving out this pause,
but if your machine has trouble receiving,
then you should re-record the OGM to
include it.

Telephone services and external devices

Special line considerations
Roll over telephone lines

A roll over telephone system is a group of two
or more separate telephone lines that pass
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.
The calls are usually passed down or “rolled
over” to the next available telephone line in a
preset order.

RJ14

Your machine can work in a roll over system
as long as it is the last number in the
sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not
put the machine on any of the other numbers;
when the other lines are busy and a second
fax call is received, the fax call would be
transferred to a line that does not have a fax
machine. Your machine will work best on a
dedicated line.

Two-line telephone system

RJ11
RJ14

Installing machine, external two-line
TAD and two-line telephone

A two-line telephone system is nothing more
than two separate telephone numbers on the
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined
into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14
jacks may be equal in size and appearance
and both may contain four wires (black, red,
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in
a two-line telephone and see if it can access
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line
for your machine. (See Easy Receive
on page 50.)

Converting telephone wall outlets
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11
jack. The first two ways may require
assistance from the telephone company. You
can change the wall outlets from one RJ14
jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an
RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump
one of the telephone numbers to it.

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.

When you are installing an external two-line
telephone answering device (TAD) and a
two-line telephone, your machine must be
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and
at the TAD. The most common connection is
to put the machine on Line 2, which is
explained in the following steps. The back of
the two-line TAD must have two telephone
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other
labeled L2. You will need at least three
telephone line cords, the one that came with
your machine and two for your external
two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord
if you add a two-line telephone.
Place the two-line TAD and the two-line
telephone next to your machine.

Plug one end of the telephone line cord for
your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex
adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack
on the back of the machine.
Plug one end of the first telephone line cord
for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex
adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or
L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

Chapter 7

External and extension
telephones

Plug one end of the second telephone line
cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the
two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the
EXT. jack on the left side of the machine.

Using external and extension
telephones

Using extension telephones

3
1

Triplex Adapter

Two Line Telephone

External Two Line TAD

Machine

We cannot guarantee that your machine will
operate properly under all circumstances
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties
with sending or receiving faxes should be
reported first to the company who handles
your PBX.

If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at an extension telephone by
pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.
(See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 49.)

You can keep two-line telephones on other
wall outlets as always. There are two ways to
add a two-line telephone to the machine’s
wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line
cord from the two-line telephone into the
L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can
plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack
of the two-line TAD.

We suggest you ask the company who
installed your PBX to connect your machine.
If you have a multi line system we suggest
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the
last line on the system. This prevents the
machine being activated each time the
system receives telephone calls. If all
incoming calls will be answered by a
switchboard operator we recommend that
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.

If you answer a fax call at an extension
telephone, you can make your machine
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l51.

Multi-line connections (PBX)

Using an external telephone
(Connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine)

If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone connected to the EXT jack of the
machine, you can make the machine receive
the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing
Receive.
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone by
pressing Hook.

If you answer a call and no one is on
the line:
You should assume that you’re receiving a
manual fax.
Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.

Note
You can also use the Easy Receive
feature to make your machine
automatically take the call. (See Easy
Receive on page 50.)

Telephone services and external devices

For Fax/Tel mode only

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will
use the F/T Ring Time
(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick
up a voice call.

If you are at an extension telephone, you will
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring
Time and then press #51 between the
pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line,
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send
the call back to the machine by pressing l51.

Before you connect an external telephone,
remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.
jack on the machine.

1
2

External telephone

Protective Cap

Using Remote Codes

Fax Receive Code

Connect the telephone line cord to the jack
labeled EXT.

Extension telephone

If you let the machine answer first, you will
have to go to the machine so you can press
Hook to transfer the call to the cordless
handset.

You can connect a separate telephone
directly to your machine as shown in the
diagram below.

If your non-Brother cordless telephone is
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine
(see page 61) and you typically carry the
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to
answer calls during the Ring Delay.

Lift the external telephone’s handset, and
then press Hook to answer.

Connecting an external or
extension telephone

Using a non-Brother cordless
external handset

If you answer a fax call on an extension
telephone, you can tell your machine to
receive it by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l51. Wait for the chirping sounds then
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive
on page 50.)

If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone, you can make the machine
receive the fax by pressing Start.

Telephone Answer Code

If you receive a voice call and the machine is
in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T
(double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you
pick up the call on an extension telephone
you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51
(make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone by
pressing Hook.

When you are using an external telephone,
the LCD shows Telephone.

Chapter 7

Changing the Remote Codes

The preset Fax Receive Code is l51. The
preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you
are always disconnected when accessing
your External TAD, try changing the
three-digit remote codes, for example ###
and 999.

a
b

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 4.
Setup Receive
4.Remote Codes

Press a or b to choose On (or Off).
Press OK.

If you chose On in step c, enter the new
Fax Receive Code.
Press OK.

Enter the new Telephone Answer Code.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Dialing and storing numbers

How to dial

You can dial in any of the following ways.

Manual dialing

Speed dialing

Press (Address Book) and then the three
digit Speed Dial number. (See Storing Speed
Dial numbers on page 66.)

Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the
telephone or fax number.

Three-digit number

Note

One touch dialing

If the LCD shows Register Now? when
you enter a One Touch or a Speed Dial
number, it means that a number is not
stored there.

Press the One Touch key that stores the
number you want to call. (See Storing
One Touch Dial numbers on page 65.)

To dial One Touch numbers 5 to 8, hold down
Shift as you press the One Touch key.

Chapter 8

You can search alphabetically for names you
have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial
memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed Dial
numbers on page 66.)

Press

Press the dial pad key for the first few
letters of the name. (Use the chart on
Entering text on page 219 to help you
enter letters.)
Press OK.
Press a or b to scroll until you find the
name you are looking for.
Press OK.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

If you lose electrical power, the quick dial
numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.
A scan profile is the resolution and other scan
settings that you choose when you store a
number. For example, you will be asked to
select Standard, Fine, or Photo if you have
selected the I-FAX option. Or, you will be
asked to select B&W 200 dpi,
B&W 200x100 dpi, Gray 100dpi, Gray 200dpi,
Gray 300dpi, Color 100 dpi, Color 200 dpi,
Color 300dpi or Color 600 dpi if you selected
the E-Mail option. (I-FAX, Fax/Tel and E-mail
options are available as a download.)

Note
• If you do not enter a letter and press OK in
step b, all registered names will appear.
Press a or b to scroll until you find the
name you are looking for.

Storing a pause

• If the LCD shows No Contact Found
when you enter the first few letters of the
name, it means that a name for the letter
is not stored.

Fax redial
If you are sending a fax manually and the line
is busy, press Redial/Pause, wait for the
other fax machine to answer, and then press
Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you
want to make a second call to the last number
dialed, you can save time by pressing
Redial/Pause and Black Start or
Color Start.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from
the control panel.
If you are sending a fax automatically and the
line is busy, the machine will automatically
redial one time after five minutes.
64

You can set up your machine to do the
following types of easy dialing: One Touch,
Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting
faxes. You can also specify the default
resolution for each One Touch and Speed
Dial number. When you dial a quick dial
number, the LCD shows the name, if you
stored it, or the number. A scan profile can
also be stored along with the fax number.

(Address Book) twice.

Storing numbers

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second
pause between numbers. You can press
Redial/Pause as many times as needed to
increase the length of the pause.
8

Dialing and storing numbers

Storing One Touch Dial
numbers
Your machine has 4 One Touch keys where
you can store 8 fax or telephone numbers for
automatic dialing. To access numbers 5 to 8,
hold down Shift as you press the One Touch
key.

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and
E-mail options
8

Press the One Touch key where you
want to store the number.
If a number is not stored there, the LCD
shows Register Now?.
Press 1 to choose Yes.

Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail
or IFAX.
Press OK.

Choose one of the following:
 Enter the telephone or fax number
(up to 20 characters) if you selected
Fax/Tel.
Press OK.

Press the One Touch key where you
want to store the number.
If a number is not stored there, the LCD
shows Register Now?.
Press 1 to choose Yes.

Enter the telephone or fax number (up to
20 characters).
Press OK.

Choose one of the following:
 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart
on Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
 Press OK to store the number
without a name.

 Enter the E-mail address (up to
60 characters) if you selected
E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.

If you want to save a fax resolution along
with the number, choose one of the
following:

Press OK.

Note
If you selected E-Mail and save the
E-mail address, you can only use the
E-mail address when you are in Scan
mode. If you selected IFAX and save the
E-mail address, you can only use the
E-mail address when you are in Fax
mode.

Choose one of the following:
 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters).
Press OK.
 Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.

 To store the fax resolution, press a or
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo.
Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.
65

Chapter 8

If you want to save a fax/scan resolution
along with the number, choose one of
the following:
 If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,
press a or b to select Std, Fine,
S.Fine or Photo.
Press OK.
 If you selected E-Mail in step b,
press a or b to select Color100dpi,
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.

Storing Speed Dial numbers
You can store your frequently used numbers
as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial
you will only have to press a few keys
( (Address Book), the three-digit number
and Black Start or Color Start). The
machine can store 200 Speed Dial numbers
(001 - 200).

Press
(Address Book) and enter a
three-digit Speed Dial location number
(001-200).
If a number is not stored there, the LCD
shows Register Now?
Press 1 to choose Yes.

Enter the telephone or fax number (up to
20 characters).
Press OK.

Choose one of the following:

Press OK and then go to step f.
 If you selected IFAX in step b, press
a or b to select Std, Fine or Photo.
Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.

If you selected Black & White in step e,
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or
Secure PDF) that will be used to send to
your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in
step e, select the file format (PDF,
Secure PDF, JPEG, or XPS) that will be
used to send to your PC.
Press OK.

Note
• When you do a broadcast and you have
saved a scan profile along with the
number or E-mail address, the scan profile
of the One-Touch, Speed-Dial or Group
number you chose first will be applied to
the broadcast.
• You can also store the number by
pressing Menu, 2, 3, 1.

 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart
on Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
 Press OK to store the number
without a name.

If you want to save a fax resolution along
with the number, choose one of the
following:
 To store the fax resolution, press a or
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo.
Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.

Dialing and storing numbers

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and
E-mail options

Press
(Address Book) and enter a
three-digit Speed Dial location number
(001-200).
If a number is not stored there, the LCD
shows Register Now?
Press 1 to choose Yes.

Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail
or IFAX.
Press OK.

Choose one of the following:

 If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,
press a or b to select Std, Fine,
S.Fine or Photo.
Press OK.
 If you selected E-Mail in step b,
press a or b to select Color100dpi,
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.
Press OK and then go to step f.

 Enter the telephone or fax number
(up to 20 characters) if you selected
Fax/Tel.

 If you selected IFAX in step b, press
a or b to select Std, Fine or Photo.

Press OK.
 Enter the E-mail address (up to
60 characters) if you selected
E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on
Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.

Choose one of the following:
 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters).
Press OK.

If you want to save a fax/scan resolution
along with the number, choose one of
the following:

Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.

 Press OK to store the number or
E-mail address without a name.

Chapter 8

Changing One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers
If you try to store a One Touch or Speed Dial
number over an existing number, the LCD will
show the name or number already stored
there. If your machine has a scheduled job or
you have set a fax forwarding number, the
LCD will ask you if you want to change the
number.

Do one of the following:
 To change a stored One Touch
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.
Press OK.

e
8

 To store the fax resolution, press a or
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo.
Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.

f
a

Press OK.
One Touch Dial
Select One Touch

 To change a stored Speed Dial
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

Choose the One Touch number you
want to change.

Press OK.

 To change a stored Speed Dial
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

Speed Dial
Speed Dial? #

Press OK.

Choose the Speed Dial number you
want to change then press OK.

Speed Dial
Speed Dial? #

Do one of the following:

 To exit without making a change,
press 2.

Choose the Speed Dial number you
want to change then press OK.

Enter a new number.
Press OK.

Press d or c to position the cursor under
the character you want to change, and
then press Clear/Back to delete it.
Repeat for each character you want to
delete.

Do one of the following:
 To change the stored number,
press 1.
 To exit without making a change,
press 2.

#005:MIKE
1.Change 2.Exit

Do one of the following:
 To change a stored One Touch
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Choose the One Touch number you
want to change.

 To change the stored number,
press 1.

Press Stop/Exit.

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and
E-mail options

One Touch Dial
Select One Touch

If you want to save a fax resolution along
with the number, one of the following:

#005:MIKE
1.Change 2.Exit

Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail
or IFAX.
Press OK.

Enter a new number or character.
Press OK.

Dialing and storing numbers

Press d or c to position the cursor under
the character you want to change, and
then press Clear/Back to delete it.
Repeat for each character you want to
delete.

Use the dial pad to enter a group
number (01 to 20).
Press OK.

To add One Touch or Speed Dial
numbers follow the instructions below:

Follow the directions beginning in
step e in Storing One-Touch dial
numbers and Storing Speed-Dial
numbers. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed
Dial numbers on page 66.)

Setting up Groups for
Broadcasting
If you often want to send the same fax
message to many fax numbers you can set
up a group.
Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a
Speed Dial number. Each group uses up a
One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You
can then send the fax message to all the
numbers stored in a group just by pressing a
One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial
number, and then pressing Black Start.
Before you can add numbers to a group, you
need to store them as One Touch or Speed
Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small
groups, or you can assign up to 207 numbers
to one large group.

 For One Touch numbers, press the
One Touch keys one after the other.
 For Speed Dial numbers, press
(Address Book) and then enter
the three-digit Speed Dial location.
The LCD will display your chosen One
Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial
numbers with a # (for example l006,
#009).

Press OK when you have finished
adding numbers.

Do one of the following:
 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart
on Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.
Press OK.
 Press OK to store the group without
a name.

Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.

 To store the fax resolution, press a or
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or
Photo.

Address Book
3.Setup Groups

Choose the One Touch key or Speed
Dial location where you want to store the
group.
 Press a One Touch key.
 Press
(Address Book) and then
enter the three-digit Speed Dial
location.
Press OK.

If you want to save a fax resolution along
with the number, choose one of the
options below:

Press OK.
 Press OK if you do not want to
change the default resolution.

Do one of the following:
 To store another group for
broadcasting, go to step b.
 To finish storing groups for
broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 8

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and
E-mail options

 Enter the name using the dial pad
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart
on Entering text on page 219 to help
you enter letters.

Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.
Address Book
3.Setup Groups

Press OK.

Choose an empty location where you
want to store the group in one of the
following ways:
 Press a One Touch key.

 Press OK to store the group without
a name.

 Press
(Address Book) and then
enter the three-digit Speed Dial
location.

Press OK.

Use the dial pad to enter a group
number (01 to 20).
Press OK.

Press a or b to select Fax/IFAX or
E-Mail.
Press OK.

To add One Touch or Speed Dial
numbers follow the instructions below:

 If you selected E-mail in step d,
press a or b to select Color100dpi,
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.
Press OK.
 Press OK if you don't want to change
the default resolution.

Press OK when you have finished
adding numbers.

You can save a fax/scan resolution
along with the number. Do one of the
following:
 If you selected Fax/IFAX in step d,
press a or b to select Std, Fine,
S.Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

Do one of the following:

Note
If you have selected Fax/IFAX in step d
and added One-Touch or Speed-Dial
numbers that are stored as 'I-Fax', you
cannot select S.Fine.

If you selected Black & White in step h,
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or
Secure PDF) that will be used to send to
your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in
step h, select the file format (PDF,
Secure PDF, JPEG or XPS) that will be
used to send your PC.
Press OK.

Note
Fax Broadcasting is for black & white only.

Dialing and storing numbers

Dialing access codes and
credit card numbers

You can combine more than one Quick Dial
number when you dial. This feature may be
useful if you need to dial an access code for
a cheaper rate from another long distance
carrier.
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on
Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ on Speed Dial
#002. You can use them both to dial
‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:
Press

(Address Book), 003.

Press
(Address Book), 002 and
Black Start or Color Start.
Numbers can be added manually by entering
them on the dial pad:
Press
(Address Book), 003, 7001 (on the
dial pad), and Black Start or Color Start.

This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add
a pause by pressing Redial/Pause key.

Pause

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second
pause between numbers. You can press
Redial/Pause as many times as needed to
increase the length of the pause.

Tone or Pulse (Canada only)

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need
to send Tone signals (for example, for
telephone banking), follow the instructions
below. If you have Touch Tone service, you
will not need this feature to send tone signals.

a
b

Press Hook.
Press # on the machine’s control panel.
Any digits dialed after this will send tone
signals.
When you hang up, the machine will
return to the Pulse dialing service.

Remote Fax Options
(black & white only)
d

Remote Fax Options ARE NOT available for
color fax.
Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes
while you are away from the machine.

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.
Backup Print
On

You can use only one Remote Fax Option at
a time.

Press Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT

Fax Forwarding
The Fax Forwarding feature lets you
automatically forward your received faxes to
another machine.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
Remote Fax Opt
1.Fwd/Page/Store

Press a or b to choose Fax Forward.
Press OK.
The LCD will ask you to enter the fax
number you want your faxes to be
forwarded to.

Enter the forwarding number using the
dial pad (up to 20 digits), using a
One Touch key or press
(Address Book) and the three-digit
location.
Press OK.

Note
• If you store a group on a One Touch key
or a Speed Dial location, the faxes will be
forwarded to several fax numbers.
• You can also enter an E-mail address if
your machine has been configured for the
Internet Fax feature. (For details about
Internet Fax, see the Network User’s
Guide on the CD-ROM.

If you choose Backup Print On, the
machine will also print the fax at your
machine so you will have a copy. This is a
safety feature in case there is a power
failure before the fax is forwarded or a
problem at the receiving machine. The
machine can store faxes for
approximately 60 hours if there is a power
failure.

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Paging
When Paging is chosen, the machine dials
the cell phone number you programmed. This
activates your cell phone or pager so you will
know that you have a fax message in the
machine’s memory.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
Remote Fax Opt
1.Fwd/Page/Store

Press a or b to choose Paging.
Press OK.

Enter your cell phone number followed
by # # (up to 20 digits).Press OK.
Do not include the area code if it is the
same as that of your machine.
For example, press
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.

Do one of the following:
 If you pager needs a PIN, enter the
PIN, press #, press Redial/Pause,
enter your fax number followed by
##. Press OK. (For example, press:
1 2 3 4 5 # Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5
5 6 7 8 9 # #)

Fax Storage

The Fax Storage feature lets you store your
received faxes in the machine’s memory. You
can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax
machine at another location using the remote
retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax
messages on page 77.) Your machine will
automatically print a copy of the stored fax.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
Remote Fax Opt
1.Fwd/Page/Store

Press a or b to choose Fax Storage.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
If Fax Storage is turned on your
machine cannot receive a color fax unless
the sending machine converts it to black &
white.

 If you do not need a PIN, press OK.
 If you are programming a cell phone
number, press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• If you have set Paging, a backup copy will
automatically be printed at the machine.
• You cannot change a Paging or PIN
number remotely.

Chapter 9

PC Fax Receive

If you turn on the PC Fax Receive feature
your machine will store received faxes in
memory and send them to your PC
automatically. You can then use your PC to
view and store these faxes.
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night
or on the weekend, for example), your
machine will receive and store your faxes in
its memory. The LCD will show the number of
stored faxes received, for example:
PC Fax Msg:001
When you start your PC and the PC Fax
Receiving software runs, your machine
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.
For PC Fax Receive to work you must have
the PC-FAX Receive software running on
your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX receiving
in the Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.)
If you choose Backup Print On, the machine
will also print the fax.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
Remote Fax Opt
1.Fwd/Page/Store

Press a or b to choose
PC Fax Receive.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose or your
computer name if the machine is
connected to a network.
Select ab or OK

Press OK.

Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Backup Print
Off
Press OK.

e
74

Press Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT
If you choose Backup Print On, the
machine will also print the fax at your
machine so you will have a copy. This is a
safety feature in case there is a power
failure before the fax is forwarded or a
problem at the receiving machine. The
machine can store faxes for
approximately 60 hours if there is a power
failure.

Note
• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite
software on your PC. Make sure your PC
is connected and turned on. (For details
see PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)
• If your machine has a problem and is
unable to print faxes in memory, you can
use this setting to transfer your faxes to a
PC. (For details, see Error and
maintenance messages on page 144.)
• PC Fax Receive is not supported in Mac
OS. (See PC-FAX receiving in the
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Changing Remote Fax
Options

The LCD will ask you the following
message:
9

Backup Print
On

If received faxes are left in your machine’s
memory when you change to another
Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you the
following message:
Erase All Fax?
1.Yes 2.No
or
Print All Fax?
1.Yes 2.No
 If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be
erased or printed before the setting
changes. If a backup copy has already
been printed it will not be printed again.
 If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not
be erased or printed and the setting will be
unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s
memory when you change to
PC Fax Receive from another remote fax
option (Fax Forward, Paging or
Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the
following message:
Send Fax to PC?
1.Yes 2.No
 If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be
sent to your PC before the setting
changes. Faxes in the memory will be sent
to your PC when the PC Fax Receive icon
is active on your PC. (See the Software
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Backup Print
Off
Press a or b to choose On or Off.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.
 If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not
be erased or transferred to your PC and
the setting will be unchanged.

Turning off Remote Fax
Options

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
Remote Fax Opt
1.Fwd/Page/Store

Press a or b to choose Off.
Press OK.

Note
The LCD will give you options if there are
received faxes still in your machine’s
memory. (See Changing Remote Fax
Options on page 75.)

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 9

Remote retrieval

The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve
your stored fax messages when you are not
at the machine. You can call your machine
from any touch tone telephone or fax
machine, then use the Remote Access Code
to retrieve your messages.

Setting a Remote Access
Code

Using your Remote Access
Code

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers,
immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l).

The machine signals if it has received
messages:

The Remote Access Code feature lets you
access the remote retrieval features when
you are away from your machine. Before you
use the remote access and retrieval features,
you have to set up your own code. The
default code is an inactive code: – – –l.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 2.

 No beeps
No messages received.
 1 long beep
Fax message received.

The machine gives two short beeps to
tell you to enter a command (See
Remote fax commands on page 78).
The machine will hang up if you wait
longer than 30 seconds before entering
a command. If you enter an invalid
command the machine will beep three
times.

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you
have finished.

Hang up.

Remote Fax Opt
2.Remote Access

Enter a three-digit code using the
numbers 0 – 9, l or #.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
Do not use the same code used for your
Fax Receive Code (l51) or Telephone
Answer Code (#51). (See Changing the
Remote Codes on page 62.)
You can change your code at any time. If you
want to make your code inactive, press
Clear/Back and then OK in b to restore the
inactive setting – – –l.

Note
If your machine is set to Manual mode,
you can still access the remote retrieval
features. Dial the fax number as normal
and let the machine ring. After
100 seconds you will hear a long beep to
tell you to enter the remote access code.
You will then have 30 seconds to enter the
code.

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Retrieving fax messages

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers,
immediately enter your Remote Access
Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear
one long beep, you have messages.

When you hear two short beeps, use the
dial pad to press 9 6 2.

Wait for a long beep, and then use the
dial pad to enter the number of the
remote fax machine where you want
your fax messages sent, followed by ##
(up to 20 digits).

Changing the Fax Forwarding
number
You can change the default setting of your fax
forwarding number from another telephone or
fax machine using touch tone.

Dial your fax number from a telephone
or another fax machine using touch
tone.

When your machine answers, enter
your Remote Access Code (3 digits
followed by l). If you hear one long
beep, you have messages.

When you hear two short beeps, use the
dial pad to press 9 5 4.

Wait for a long beep, and then use the
dial pad to enter the new number of the
remote fax machine where you want
your fax messages forwarded followed
by ## (up to 20 digits).

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you
have finished.

Hang up after you hear your machine
beep.

Hang up after you hear your machine
beep. Your machine will call the other
machine, which will then print your fax
messages.

Note
You can insert a pause in a fax number by
using the # key.

Chapter 9

Remote fax commands
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you
call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.
Remote commands
95

Change the fax forwarding,
paging or fax storage settings
1 OFF

You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your
messages.

2 Fax Forwarding

One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three
short beeps, you cannot make the change because something
has not been set up (for example, a fax forwarding or paging
number has not been registered). You can register your fax
forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing the Fax
Forwarding number on page 77.) Once you have registered the
number, fax forwarding will work.

3 Paging
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage

Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes

Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax
messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 77.)

3 Erase faxes from the memory

If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased
from the memory.

Check the receiving status
1 Fax

Operation details

You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.
If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three
short beeps.

Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD

If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.

2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90

Exit

Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then
replace the handset.

Polling

Polling lets you set up your machine so other
people can receive faxes from you, but they
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,
so you pay for the call. The polling feature
needs to be set up on both machines for this
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.

Polling receive

Sequential polling
Sequential polling lets you request
documents from several fax machines in one
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling
Report will be printed.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.

Make sure you are in Fax mode

Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.
Setup Receive
7.Polling RX

Enter the fax number you are polling.
Press Start.
The LCD will show Dialing.

Setup Receive
7.Polling RX

Polling receive lets you call another fax
machine to receive a fax.

Specify the fax machines you want to
poll by using One Touch, Speed Dial,
Search, a Group or the dial pad. You
must press OK between each location.
Press OK.

Press Start.
The machine polls each number or
Group number in turn for a document.

Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing
to cancel the polling process.
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,
press Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and
canceling waiting jobs on page 45.)

Chapter 10

Polled transmit
(black & white only)

Note
10

Polled transmit lets you set up your machine
to wait with a document so another fax
machine can call and retrieve it.

Setup for polled transmit

Make sure you are in Fax mode

b
c

Load your document.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.
Setup Send
6.Polled TX

Press a or b to choose On (or Off).
Press OK.

Press 2 to choose 2.No if you do not
want to enter more settings when the
LCD asks you the following message:
Other Settings
1.Yes 2.No

f
g

Press Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of
the options below:
Next Page?
1.Yes 2.No(Send)
 Press 1 to send another page.
Go to step h.
 Press 2 or Start to send the
document.

Place the next page on the scanner
glass, press OK. Repeat steps g and
h for each additional page.
The document will be stored in memory
and wait to be polled.

To delete the fax from memory, press
Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and canceling
waiting jobs on page 45.)
10

The document will be stored and can be
retrieved from any other fax machine until
you delete the fax from memory.

Printing reports

Fax reports

Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.

Report Setting
1.Transmission

You need to set up the Transmission
Verification Report and Journal Period using
the Menu keys.

Transmission verification
report

Press a or b to choose On, On+Image,
Off or Off+Image.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This
report lists the receiving party’s name or fax
number, the time and date of transmission,
duration of transmission, number of pages
sent, and whether or not the transmission
was successful.
There are several settings available for the
Transmission Verification Report:
 On: Prints a report after every fax you
send.

Note
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image,
the image will only appear on the
Transmission Verification Report if Real
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See
Real Time Transmission on page 43.)
• If your transmission is successful, OK will
appear next to RESULT on the
Transmission Verification Report. If
transmission is not successful, NG will
appear next to RESULT.

 On+Image: Prints a report after every fax
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page
appears on the report.
 Off: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if you send a color
fax that the receiving machine prints in
black and white. Off is the default setting.

 Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if you send a color
fax that the receiving machine prints in
black and white. A portion of the fax’s first
page appears on the report.

Chapter 11

Fax Journal

Reports

You can set the machine to print a fax journal
(activity report) at specific intervals (every
50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The
default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this
means that your machine will print the journal
when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

The following reports are available:

If you set the interval to Off, you can still print
the report by following the steps on the next
page.

2 Help List

3 Tel Index List

Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.
Report Setting
2.Journal Period

Press a or b to choose an interval.
Press OK.
If you choose 7 days, you will be asked
to choose a day when you want the
7 day countdown to begin.
If you choose Every 50 Faxes, the
LCD shows Accepted. Then go to
step d.
Enter the time to begin printing, in
24 hour format.
For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

If you choose 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the
machine will print the report at the selected
time and then erase all jobs from its memory.
If the machine’s memory becomes full with
200 jobs before the time you chose has
passed, the machine will print the journal
early and then erase all jobs from memory.
If you want an extra report before it is due to
print, you can print it manually without erasing
the jobs from memory.

1 Transmission
Displays the Transmission Verification
Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes
and prints the last report.
Prints a list of commonly used functions to
help you program your machine.
Prints a list of names and numbers stored
in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory
in numerical or alphabetical order.
4 Fax Journal
Prints a list of information about your last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)
5 User Settings
Print a list of your current settings.
6 Network Config
Lists your network settings.

Printing reports

How to print a report

MFC-9325CW:

Press Menu, 6.
Select ab or OK
6.Print Reports

Do one of the following:
 Press a or b to choose the report you
want.
Press OK.
 Enter the number of the report you
want to print. For example, press 2 to
print the Help List.

c
d

Press Black Start or Color Start.
Press Stop/Exit.

MFC-9125CN:

a
b

Press Reports.
Do one of the following:
 Press a or b to choose the report you
want.
Press OK.
 Enter the number of the report you
want to print. For example, press 2 to
print the Help List.

If you choose 1.Transmission,
press a or b to choose
1.View on LCD or
2.Print Reports.
Then press OK.
If you choose 3.Tel Index List,
press a or b to choose 1.Numeric
or 2.Alphabetic.
Then press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 11

Section III

Copy
Making copies

III

Making copies

How to copy
Entering copy mode
Press

Stack/Sort

Copy ratio and Copy layout

Contrast

Quality

Number of copies

Making a single copy

Make sure you are in Copy mode

Load your document in the ADF or on
the scanner glass.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Making multiple copies

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document in the ADF.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

(COPY) to enter Copy mode.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Note
• To sort your copies, see Sorting copies
using the ADF on page 89.

• If the LCD shows "Please Wait" and the
machine stops copying while you are
making multiple copies, please wait for 30
to 40 seconds until the machine finishes
the color registrations and cleaning
process of the belt unit.

Stop copying
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Making copies

Copy options
(temporary settings)

To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the
instructions below:
12

When you want to quickly change the copy
settings temporarily for the next copy, use the
temporary Copy keys. You can use different
combinations.

The machine returns to its default settings
one minute after copying, unless you have
set the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less.
(See Mode Timer on page 25.)

Enlarging or reducing the
image copied

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document.

d
e

Press Enlarge/Reduce.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Do one of the following:
 Press a or b to choose the
enlargement or reduction ratio you
want.
Press OK.
 Press a or b to choose
Custom(25-400%).

Press OK.

You can choose the following enlargement or
reduction ratios:
Press

100%*

Use the dial pad to enter an
enlargement or reduction ratio from
25% to 400%. (For example, press
5 3 to enter 53%.)

97% LTRiA4

Press OK.

94% A4iLTR
91% Full Page
85% LTRiEXE
83% LGLiA4
78% LGLiLTR
70% A4iA5

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Note
Page Layout Options 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L),
4 in 1(P) or 4 in 1(L) are not available with
Enlarge/Reduce.

50%
Custom(25-400%)
200%
141% A5iA4
104% EXEiLTR

* The factory setting is shown in Bold with an
asterisk.
Custom(25-400%) allows you to enter a
ratio from 25% to 400%.

Chapter 12

Using the Options key

Use the Options key to quickly set the following copy settings temporarily for the next copy.
Press

Menu selections

Options

Press a or b, then press OK

Stack/Sort

Stack*

(appears when the document
is in the ADF)

Sort

Brightness

b-onnnn+a

Page

b-nonnn+a
b-nnonn+a*
b-nnnon+a
b-nnnno+a
Contrast

b-onnnn+a

b-nonnn+a
b-nnonn+a*
b-nnnon+a
b-nnnno+a
Page Layout

Off(1 in 1)*
2 in 1 (P)
2 in 1 (L)
4 in 1 (P)
4 in 1 (L)

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Making copies

Improving copy quality

You can choose from a range of quality
settings. The default setting is Auto.
Auto is the recommended mode for
ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents
that contain both text and photographs.
 Photo
Suitable for copying photographs.
 Text
Suitable for documents containing only
text.
To temporarily change the quality setting,
follow the steps below:
Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document.

d
e

Press Quality.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Press a or b to choose Auto, Photo or
Text.
Press OK.
Press Black Start or Color Start.

To change the default setting, follow the
steps below:

You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be
stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so
on.

 Auto

Sorting copies using the ADF

Press Menu, 3, 1.
Copy
1.Quality

Press a or b to choose the copy quality.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document in the ADF.

Press Options. Press a or b to choose
Stack/Sort.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose Stack or Sort.
Press OK.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Adjusting Contrast, Color and
Brightness
Contrast

Adjust the contrast to help an image look
sharper and more vivid.
To temporarily change the contrast setting,
follow the steps below:

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document.

Press Options.
Press a or b to choose Contrast.
Press OK.

Press a or b to increase or decrease the
contrast.
Press OK.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Chapter 12

To change the default setting follow the steps
below:

Press Menu, 3, 3.

Press a or b to increase or decrease the
contrast.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press a or b to choose 1.Red,
2.Green, or 3.Blue.
Press OK.

Press a or b to increase or decrease the
color saturation.
Press OK.

Return to step b to choose the next
color. Or press Stop/Exit.

Brightness

To temporarily change the copy brightness
setting, follow the steps below:

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document.

Press Options.
Press a or b to choose Brightness.
Press OK.

Press a to make a lighter copy or press
b to make a darker copy.
Press OK.

Press Black Start or Color Start.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

To change the default setting follow the steps
below:
Press Menu, 3, 2.
Copy
2.Brightness

Press a to make a lighter copy or press
b to make a darker copy.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 3, 4.
Copy
4.Color Adjust

Adjust the copy brightness to make copies
darker or lighter.

You can change the default setting for color
saturation.
To change the default setting follow the steps
below:

Copy
3.Contrast

Color saturation

Making copies

Making N in 1 copies
(page layout)

Place the next page on the scanner
glass.
Press OK.
Repeat steps g and h for each page of
the layout.

After all the pages have been scanned,
press 2 in step g to finish.

You can reduce the amount of paper used
when copying by using the N in 1 copy
feature. This allows you to copy two or four
pages onto one page, which lets you save
paper.

If you are copying from the ADF:

IMPORTANT
• Please make sure the paper size is set to
Letter, A4, Legal or Folio.
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means
Landscape.
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce
setting with the N in 1 feature.

Insert your document face up in the direction
shown below:
 2 in 1 (P)

 2 in 1 (L)

Make sure you are in Copy mode

b
c

Load your document.

Press Options. Press a or b to choose
Page Layout. Press OK.

Press a or b to choose 2 in 1 (P),
2 in 1 (L), 4 in 1 (P),
4 in 1 (L) or Off(1 in 1).
Press OK.

.
 4 in 1 (P)

Use the dial pad to enter the number of
copies (up to 99).

Press Black Start or Color Start to
scan the page.
If you placed the document in the ADF,
the machine scans the pages and starts
printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go
to step g.

After the machine scans the page, press
1 to scan the next page.

 4 in 1 (L)

Next Page?
1.Yes 2.No

Chapter 12

If you are copying from the scanner
glass:
Insert your document face down in the
direction shown below:
 2 in 1 (P)

 2 in 1 (L)

 4 in 1 (P)

 4 in 1 (L)

Out of memory
message
If the memory becomes full while you are
making copies, the LCD message will guide
you through the next step.
If you get an Out of Memory message
while scanning a subsequent page, you will
have the option to press Black Start or
Color Start to copy the pages scanned so
far, or to press Stop/Exit to cancel the
operation.
To gain extra memory, you can do the
following:
 Print the faxes that are in the memory.
(See Printing a fax from the memory
on page 52.)
 You can turn off Fax Storage. (See
Turning off Remote Fax Options
on page 75.)
 Add optional memory. (See Memory
board on page 126.)

Note
When you get an Out of Memory
message, you may be able to make
copies if you first print the incoming faxes
in the memory to restore the memory to
100%.

Section IV

Direct printing
Printing photos from a digital camera
(MFC-9325CW only)
94
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive
(MFC-9325CW only)
99

Printing photos from a digital
camera (MFC-9325CW only)
Using PictBridge
Setting your digital camera

Make sure your camera is in PictBridge
mode. The following PictBridge settings may
be available from the LCD of your PictBridge
compatible camera. Depending on your
camera some of these settings may not be
available.

Your Brother machine supports the
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect
to and print photos directly from any
PictBridge compatible digital camera.
Even if your camera is not in PictBridge mode
or does not support PictBridge, you can
connect your camera as a normal storage
device. This enables you to print photos from
your camera. Follow the steps for “Printing
data from a USB Flash memory drive
(MFC-9325CW only) on page 99”.

 Copies
 Qualities
 Paper size
 Date print
 File name print
 Layout (1 in 1 printing/Index printing only)

Before using
PictBridge
PictBridge requirements

Note
The names and availability of each setting
depends on the specification of your
camera.

To avoid errors, remember the following
points:

You can also set the following PictBridge
settings by using the control panel.

 The machine and the digital camera must
be connected using a suitable USB cable.
 The image file must be taken with the
digital camera you want to connect to the
machine.

Menu selections

Options

Paper Size

Letter, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6

Orientation

Portrait, Landscape 1

Date & Time

Off, On

File Name

Off, On

Print Quality

Normal, Fine

If you choose the paper size Letter, A4 or B5, Portrait
will be chosen. If you choose A5, B6 or A6,
Landscape will be chosen.

Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only)

Printing images

Press Menu, 5, 3.
USB Direct I/F
3.PictBridge

To set the PictBridge settings, press a or
b to choose 1.Paper Size,
2.Orientation, 3.Date & Time,
4.File Name, or 5.Print Quality.
Press OK.

Press a or b to choose an option for
each menu setting.
Press OK.
Repeat b to c for each PictBridge
setting.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• Camera settings are prioritized as long as
your camera is not set to use your
machine’s settings (default settings). If
your camera is set to use your machine’s
settings, the machine will print your photo
using the settings below.
Machine settings

Default settings

Paper Size

Letter

Orientation

Portrait

Date & Time

Off

File Name

Off

Print Quality

Normal

• Please refer to the documentation
supplied with your camera for more
detailed information on changing
PictBridge settings.

Make sure that your camera is turned
off. Connect your camera to the USB
direct interface (1) on the front of the
machine using a suitable USB cable.

Turn on the camera. Make sure your
camera is in PictBridge mode.
When the machine has recognized the
camera, the LCD shows the following
messages, depending on which mode
the machine is in:
04/20 15:30 Fax
Camera Connected
Scan:Select ab
Camera Connected
Stack Copies:02
Camera Connected

Set your camera to print an image. Set
the number of copies if you are asked.
When the machine starts printing an
image, the LCD will show the following
message:
PictBridge
Printing. Kee...

Note
Please refer to the documentation
supplied with your camera for detailed
operations how to print using PictBridge.

Chapter 13

IMPORTANT
• To prevent damage to your machine, do
not connect any device other than a digital
camera or USB flash memory drive to the
USB direct interface.
• DO NOT remove the digital camera from
the USB direct interface until the machine
has finished printing.

DPOF printing

Printing images with
Secure Function
Lock 2.0 enabled
(MFC-9325CW only)
For more information about Secure Function
Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have
supplied.

DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation) created this standard to
make it easier to print images from a digital
camera.

Make sure that your camera is turned
off. Connect your camera to the USB
direct interface (1) on the front of the
printer using a suitable USB cable.

If your digital camera supports DPOF
printing, you will be able to choose on the
digital camera display the images and
number of copies you want to print.
The following DPOF settings are available.
 1 in 1 printing
 Copies

Turn on the camera. Make sure your
camera is in PictBridge mode.
When the machine has recognized the
camera, the LCD shows the following
message.
Access Denied

c
d

Press a or b to choose ID. Press OK.
Enter the password. Press OK.
Change ID
PIN:XXXX

Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only)

Note
If your ID has restricted options, the
following messages appear on the LCD.
Message

Meaning

Access Denied

Printing documents
directly from a camera to
the Brother machine is
restricted.

Limit Exceeded

The number of pages you
are allowed to print is
exceeded. The print job
will be canceled.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the digital camera from
the USB direct interface until the printer
has finished printing.

Mono Print Only Printing color documents
is restricted.
Not Available

Printing pictures directly
from a camera to the
Brother machine is
restricted.

The LCD shows one of the following
messages, depending on which mode
the machine is in:
04/20 15:30 Fax
Camera Connected
Scan:Select ab
Camera Connected
Stack Copies:02
Camera Connected

Set your camera to print an image. Set
the number of copies if you are asked.
When the machine starts printing an
image, the LCD will show the following
message:

PictBridge
Printing. Kee...

Note
Please refer to the documentation
supplied with your camera for detailed
operations how to print using PictBridge.

Chapter 13

Connecting a camera
as a storage device
Even if your camera is not in PictBridge
mode, or does not support PictBridge, you
can connect your camera as a normal
storage device. This enables you to print
photos from your camera.
Follow the steps in Printing data directly from
the USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW
only) on page 100.
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge
mode, see Setting your digital camera
on page 94.)

Note
The name of the storage mode and
operation differs among digital cameras.
Please refer to the documentation
supplied with your camera for detailed
information, such as how to switch from
PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.

Understanding the
error messages
Once you are familiar with the types of errors
that can occur while you are using the
PictBridge, you can easily identify and
troubleshoot any problems.
 Out of Memory
This message will appear if you are
working with images that are too large for
the machine's memory.
 Unusable Device
This message will appear if you connect
an incompatible or broken device to the
USB direct interface. To clear the error,
unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.
(For more detailed solutions, see Error and
maintenance messages on page 144.)

Printing data from a USB Flash
memory drive
(MFC-9325CW only)

With the Direct Print feature, you do not need
a computer to print data. You can print by just
plugging your USB Flash memory drive into
the machine’s USB direct interface.

Creating a PRN or
PostScript® 3™ file for
direct printing

Note
Some USB Flash memory drives may not
work with the machine.

Supported file formats

Note
The screens in this section may vary
depending on your application and
operating system.
14

Direct Print supports the following file
formats:
 PDF version 1.7 1

From the menu bar of an application,
click File, then Print.

Choose Brother MFC-XXXX Printer (1)
and check the Print to file box (2).
Click Print.

 JPEG
 Exif + JPEG
 PRN (created by Brother driver)

 TIFF (scanned by all MFC or DCP Brother
models)

 PostScript® 3™ (created by the Brother
BRScript3 printer driver)
 XPS version 1.0
1

PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a
JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not
supported.

Choose the folder you want to save the
file to and enter the file name if you are
prompted to.
If you are prompted for a file name only,
you can also specify the folder you want
to save the file in by entering the
directory name. For example:
C:\Temp\FileName.prn
If you have a USB Flash memory drive
or digital camera connected to your
computer, you can save the file directly
to the USB Flash memory drive.

Chapter 14

Printing data directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive
(MFC-9325CW only)
a

Do one of the following:
 Press a or b to choose a setting you
need to change and press OK, and
then press a or b to choose an option
for the setting and press OK.
 If you do not need to change the
current default settings, go to
step d.

Connect your USB Flash memory drive
to the USB direct interface (1) on the
front of the machine.
The Direct key will light up. Press
Direct. Your machine will enter Direct
Print Mode.

Print File Set
Paper Size
e

Note
• You can choose the following settings:
Paper Size
Media Type
Multiple Page
Orientation

Collate
Print Quality
PDF Option

Press a or b to choose the folder name
or file name you want to print.
Press OK.
If you have chosen the folder name,
press a or b to choose the file name you
want to print.
Press OK.
Direct Print
1.FILE_1.PDF

Note
• If you want to print an index of the files,
choose Index Print, and then press
OK. Press Black Start or Color Start to
print the data.
• File names that are stored in your USB
Flash memory drive can be displayed the
following characters on the LCD: A B C D
EFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ0123456789$%’`-@{}~!#
()&_^
100

• Depending on the file type, some of
these settings may not appear.

Press Black Start or Color Start if you
have finished.

Press the dial pad key to enter the
number of copies you want.
Press OK.
Copies
= 1

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only)

Press Black Start or Color Start to
print the data.

IMPORTANT
• To prevent damage to your machine, DO
NOT connect any device other than a
digital camera or USB Flash memory drive
to the USB direct interface.
• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory
drive or digital camera from the USB direct
interface until the machine has finished
printing.

Note

Printing data directly
from the USB flash
memory drive with
Secure Function
Lock 2.0 enabled
(MFC-9325CW only)

For more information about Secure Function
Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have
supplied.

You can change the default settings for
Direct Print by using the control panel
when the machine is not in the Direct Print
mode. Press Menu, 5 to enter the
USB Direct I/F menu. (See Entering
text on page 219.)

Connect your USB Flash memory drive
to the USB direct interface (1) on the
front of the machine.
The Direct key will light up. Press
Direct. Your machine will enter Direct
Print Mode.

The following message appears if
Secure Function Lock is on.
Access Denied

c
d

Press a or b to choose ID. Press OK.
Enter the password. Press OK.
Change ID
PIN:XXXX

101

Chapter 14

Note

If your ID has the restricted options, the
following messages appear on the LCD.
Message

Meaning

Access Denied

Printing documents
directly from the USB
flash memory drive to the
Brother machine is
restricted.

Limit Exceeded

The number of pages you
are allowed to print is
exceeded. The print job
will be canceled.

No Permission

Printing color documents
is restricted. The print job
will be canceled.

Mono Print Only Printing color documents
is restricted.
Not Available

e
f

• If you want to print an index of the files,
choose Index Print, and then press
OK. Press Black Start or Color Start to
print the data.
• File names containing more than
8 characters will appear on the LCD as the
first 6 characters of the file name followed
by a tilde mark (~) and a number.
For example, “HOLIDAY2007.JPG” would
appear as “HOLIDA~1.JPG”.
Only the following characters can be
displayed on the LCD:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
UVWXYZ0123456789$%’`-@
{}~!#()&_^

Do one of the following:
 Press a or b to choose a setting you
need to change and press OK, and
then press a or b to choose an option
for the setting and press OK.

Printing pictures directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive to the
Brother machine is
restricted.

 If you do not need to change the
current default settings, go to
step h.

The file names appear if the password is
correct.

Print File Set
Paper Size
e

Press a or b to choose the folder name
or file name you want to print.
Press OK.
If you have chosen the folder name,
press a or b to choose the file name you
want to print.
Press OK.

Note
• You can choose the following settings:
Paper Size
Media Type
Multiple Page

Direct Print
1.FILE_1.PDF

Orientation
Collate
Print Quality
PDF Option
• Depending on the file type, some of
these settings may not appear.

h
102

Press Black Start or Color Start if you
have finished.

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only)

Press the dial pad key to enter the
number of copies you want.
Press OK.
Copies
= 1

Press Black Start or Color Start to
print the data.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash memory
from the USB direct interface until the
printer has finished printing.

Understanding the
error messages

Once you are familiar with the types of errors
that can occur while you print data from the
USB Flash memory drive with Direct Print,
you can easily identify and troubleshoot any
problems.
 Out of Memory
This message will appear if you are
working with images that are too large for
the machine’s memory.
 Unusable Device
This message will appear if you connect
an incompatible or broken device to the
USB direct interface. To clear the error,
unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.
(See Error and maintenance messages
on page 144 for the detailed solution.)

103

Chapter 14

104

Section V

Software
Software and Network features

106

Software and Network features

The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes
the Software User’s Guide and Network
User’s Guide for features available when
connected to a computer (for example,
printing and scanning). These guides have
easy to use links that, when clicked, will take
you directly to a particular section.
You can find information on these features:
 Printing
 Scanning
 ControlCenter3 (Windows®)
 ControlCenter2 (Macintosh)
 Remote Setup
 Faxing from your computer
 Network Faxing
 Network Printing
 Network Scanning
 Wireless Network Users
(MFC-9325CW only)

Note
See Accessing the Software User’s Guide
and Network User’s Guide on page 3.

106

Section VI

Appendixes
Safety and legal
Options
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance
Menu and features
Specifications
Glossary

108
125
128
197
221
240

Safety and legal

Compilation and Publication

Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.

Choosing a location

Put your product on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk.
Put the product near a telephone wall jack and a standard grounded AC power outlet. Choose a
location where the temperature remains between 50F and 90.5F (10C and 32.5C) and the
humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).

WARNING
DO NOT expose the product to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, corrosive gasses,
moisture or dust. Doing so may create a risk of an electrical short or fire. It may also damage
the product and/or render it inoperable.
DO NOT place the product near heaters, air conditioners, electrical fans, refrigerators, or water.
Doing so may create the risk of a short circuit or fire, should water come into contact with the
product (including condensation caused by heating, air conditioning, or ventilation equipment).
DO NOT place the product near chemicals. Should the chemicals come into contact with the
product, there may be a risk of fire. The chemicals may also cause the product to malfunction
or become discolored.

108

Safety and legal

DO NOT put the product in a location where any slot or opening in the product is obstructed or
blocked. These slots and openings are provided for ventilation. Blocking the product’s
ventilation could create a risk of overheating and/or fire.
Instead:
• Keep a gap of roughly 4 inches (100 mm) between the ventilation hole and the wall.
• Place the product on a solid surface.
• DO NOT place this product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar soft surface.
• DO NOT place this product near or over a radiator or heater.
• DO NOT place this product in a “built-in” installation unless adequate ventilation is provided.
DO NOT put objects on top of the product. Doing so could increase the risk of overheating
and/or fire should the product malfunction.
DO install your product near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In the event of an
emergency, easy access to the plug and outlet will allow you to shut off power to the product
quickly and completely.
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your product and drum unit. Plastic bags are not toys.
To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose
of them properly.

To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a
wet location.

CAUTION
Avoid placing your product in a high-traffic area. If you must place it in a high-traffic area, ensure
that the product is in a safe location where it cannot be accidentally knocked-over, which could
cause injury to you and serious damage to the product. Also ensure that cords are secured so
as not to pose a tripping hazard. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
The product is heavy and may fall, causing injury to you, and serious damage to the product.

109

IMPORTANT
• DO NOT place your product next to devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.
Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product, causing print quality problems.
• DO NOT place your product next to sources of interference, such as speakers or the base units
of non Brother cordless telephones. Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product’s
electronic components.
• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic
timers. Disruption of power can delete information from the product’s memory.
• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances
or other equipment that requires a significant amount of electricity to operate. Operating this
product in conjunction with the other product(s) could create an overvoltage, tripping your
circuit breaker or blowing your fuse.

110

Safety and legal

To use the product safely

Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any
maintenance. If you do not follow these safety instructions, there is a possibility of a fire, electrical
shock, burn or suffocation.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of an electrical shock. In
addition, you could create an electrical short, which may create the risk of a fire.

There are high voltage electrodes inside the product. Before you access the inside of the
product, including for routine maintenance such as cleaning, make sure you have unplugged the
telephone line cord first and then the power cord from the AC power outlet, as well as any
telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cables from the product. Never push objects of any kind
into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts.

DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands.

Always make sure the plug is fully inserted. DO NOT use the product or handle the cord if the
cord has become worn or frayed.
DO NOT touch this product during an electrical storm.
DO NOT allow this product to come into contact with water. This product should not be used
around standing water including a bathtub, sink, or swimming pool, around appliances
containing water including a refrigerator, or in a wet basement.

111

This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind
of power source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
Always disconnect all cables from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the
equipment.
Power Cord Safety:
• This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded
plug.
• Use only the power cord supplied with this product.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people
can walk on the cord. DO NOT place this product in a position where the cord is stretched or
strain is otherwise put on the cord. Doing so may cause the cord to become worn or frayed.
• If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the
products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating.
Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not
exceed 15 amperes.
• The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).
• We DO NOT advise using an extension cord.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a
wet location.

112

Safety and legal

FIRE HAZARDS
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid that
containing alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could
cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry, lint-free cloth. See Routine maintenance on page 157 for
more information on how to clean the product.

DO NOT attempt to operate this product with a paper jam or with stray pieces of paper inside
the product. Prolonged contact of the paper with the drum unit could cause a fire.
DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner
dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the
toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak or combustible dust.
DO NOT inhale the toner powder. If toner powder is inhaled, please follow these steps
immediately:
• Move to an area with plenty of fresh air.
• Gargle and rinse your mouth out with plenty of water.
• If you develop a cough or any other symptoms soon after inhaling the toner, consult your
doctor immediately.
If toner powder is swallowed, rinse your mouth immediately and drink plenty of fresh water to
dilute the toner. Then consult your doctor immediately thereafter. For more safety information
regarding the toners used in your product, please visit the following web address to read the
Safety Data Sheets http://sds.brother.co.jp/sdsapp/index.html, which include important
information about the chemical composition of the toners and the precautions to take in case of
overexposure to toner.

113

HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the product, some internal parts will be extremely hot. To prevent injury,
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration, when you open the top or back cover
(back output tray) of the machine.

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high
speed and can pinch or entrap your hand.

This product is heavy and weighs approximately 50.5 lb (22.9 kg). To prevent injuries when
moving or lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your
fingers when you set the machine back down.

114

Safety and legal

CAUTION
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the product under the document cover, the scanner, or
the top cover as shown in the illustrations. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by
pinching them.

DO NOT put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations. Doing this may cause injury to
your fingers by pinching them.

115

IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove or damage the caution labels located on or in the product.

Note
Lightning and power surges can damage this product. We recommend that you use a quality
surge protection device on the AC power line and any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45)
cable plugged into the product, or that you unplug the cords during a lightning storm.

116

Safety and legal

Important safety instructions

1 Read all of these instructions.
2 Save these instructions for later reference.
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
4 Be careful not to inhale toner.
5 DO NOT place anything in front of the product that will block printed pages or received faxes.
DO NOT place anything in the path of printed pages or received faxes.
6 Wait until pages have exited the product before picking them up.
7 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all
servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest Brother
Authorized Service Center, please call:
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER
8 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized
Service Personnel under the following conditions:
 When the power cord is damaged or frayed. (DO NOT touch the damaged/frayed part while
unplugging your product.)
 If liquid has been spilled into the product.
 If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
 If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
 If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
 If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.

117

Regulation
Standard telephone and FCC notices
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:
 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
 Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,
USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. (See installation instructions for
details.)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i) If the equipment is causing harm to
the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment
until the problem is resolved.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.

118

Safety and legal

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.

If you are not able to solve a problem with your product, call Brother Customer Service. (See
Brother numbers on page i)

WARNING
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.

IMPORTANT
• This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or
connected to party lines.
• Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use
of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no
warranties extended or granted by this document.
• This product has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA
only. A grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC power outlet after checking the
rating of the local power supply for the product to operate properly and safely.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of
Conformity (USA only)
Responsible Party:

Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL: (908) 704-1700

declares, that the products
Product Name: MFC-9125CN / MFC-9325CW
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

119

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
 Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
 (Wireless network models only)
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

IMPORTANT
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B
digital device.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of this device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.

120

Safety and legal

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only)

NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Ce produit est conforme aux caractéristiques techniques appropriées d’Industrie Canada.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie est une indication du nombre maximal d’appareils qu'il est
permis de brancher sur une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister
en n’importe quelle combinaison d’appareils à la condition que la somme des indices
d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les appareils ne dépasse pas cinq.

For use in the USA or Canada only

These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and
the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign
countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your warranty.

Disconnect device

This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of
emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off power
completely.

LAN connection

CAUTION
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.

121

International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.

122

Safety and legal

Trademarks

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United
States and other countries.
Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related
documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those
respective companies.

Open Source Licensing Remarks

This product includes open-source software.
Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.
(For Windows®) “X:\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).
(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities
icon. License.rtf will appear.

123

Legal limitations for copying
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil
liability. The listing below is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible
prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you consult with the appropriate authority or advisor
with regard to the specific document.
The following documents issued by the United States/ Canadian Government or any of its
Agencies, States, Territories or Provineces may not be copied:
 Money
 Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
 Certificates of Deposit
 Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Selective Service or draft papers
 Passports
 United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Food Stamps
 Immigration Papers
 Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
 Identifying badges or insignias
 Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles, under certain State/Provincial law
Copying copyrighted works may be regulated by Federal, State or local laws. For more
information,consult an appropriate authority or advisor.

124

Options

This machine has the following optional accessory. You can increase the capabilities of the
machine with this item.
SO-DIMM memory

125

Memory board
MFC-9325CW and MFC-9125CN have
64 MB of standard memory. They also have
one slot for optional memory expansion. You
can increase the memory up to a maximum of
576 MB by installing one SO-DIMM (Small
Outline Dual In-line Memory Module). When
you add the optional memory, it increases the
performance for both copier and printer
operations.
In general, the machine uses
industry-standard SO-DIMM with the
following specifications:
Type: 144 pin and 64 bit output

Installing extra memory

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord.

Disconnect the interface cable from the
machine, and then unplug the power
cord from the AC power outlet.

Note
Be sure to turn off the machine’s power
switch before you install or remove the
SO-DIMM.

CAS latency: 2

Remove the plastic (1) and then
metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.

Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more
Capacity: 64, 128, 256 or 512 MB
Height: 1.25 in. (31.75 mm)

Dram Type: SDRAM 2 Bank
For information regarding memory for your
Brother machine please visit us at:
www.brother-usa.com/support/memory.

Note
• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will
not work with the machine.
• For more information, call Brother
Customer Service.

126

Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its
edges.

IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
memory chips or the board surface.

Options

Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and
align the notches in the SO-DIMM with
the protrusions in the slot. Insert the
SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it
toward the interface board until it clicks
into place (2).

Put the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)
SO-DIMM covers back on.

2
1

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and then
connect the interface cable.

Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on
the machine’s power switch.

Note
To make sure that you have installed the
SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user
settings page that shows the current
memory size. (See How to print a report
on page 83.)

127

Troubleshooting and routine
maintenance

Troubleshooting

IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.

If you are having difficulty with your machine
If you think there is a problem, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips. You can
solve most problems by yourself.
If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and
troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Printing or printing received faxes
Difficulties
 Condensed print
 Horizontal streaks

Suggestions
Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good,
you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

 Top and bottom sentences are
cut off
 Missing lines
Poor print quality

See Improving the print quality on page 136.

Vertical black lines when receiving

The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the four
drum units. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
If the problem continues, call Brother Customer Service at 1-877-BROTHER
(1-877-276-8437) (in USA) or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).

Received faxes appear as split or
blank pages.

If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.
(See Paper Size on page 25.)
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 51.)

128

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Telephone line or connections
Difficulties

Suggestions

Dialing does not work.

Check for a dial tone.
Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.) (Canada only)
Check all line cord connections.
Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.

Send a manual fax by pressing Hook or by lifting the handset of an external
telephone and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax receiving tones before
pressing Black Start or Color Start.
The machine does not answer
when called.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See
Receive Mode settings on page 49.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your
machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord
connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your
telephone company to check the line.

Receiving Faxes
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot receive a fax.

Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear
static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone
company.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL
or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as
the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 49.)
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you
should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother
machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to
leave a message on your answering machine.
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,
please see Voice Mail on page 53.
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,
please see Distinctive Ring on page 54.
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In
Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and
produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming
faxes, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer
every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.

129

Receiving Faxes (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot receive a fax.

Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:

(continued)

 If the answer mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to
1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 49.)
 If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings
programmed on your answering machine to 2.
 If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
 If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your
original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then
a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the
machine has a chance to answer.
 If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem
with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the
same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 57.)
1

Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your
Brother machine’s LINE jack.

Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then
plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.

Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your
answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.

Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
 Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing
message.
 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
 End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Set your answering machine to answer calls.

Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive
Mode settings on page 49.)

Make sure your Brother machine's Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 50.)
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference/ VoIP on page 143.)
(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.

130

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Sending faxes
Difficulties

Suggestions

Poor sending quality.

Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your
machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.
(See Cleaning the scanner on page 158.)

Transmission Verification Report
says RESULT:NG.

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.
If you are sending a PC Fax message and get RESULT:NG on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra
memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Turning off Remote Fax Options
on page 75), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory
on page 52) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and canceling
waiting jobs on page 45). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to
check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference/ VoIP on page 143.)

Sent faxes are blank.

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents
on page 23.)

Vertical black lines when sending.

Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid
on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 158.)

Cannot send a fax.

(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.

Handling incoming calls
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a
CNG Tone.

If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off. (See Easy
Receive on page 50.)

Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive
Code (default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features on a single line.

If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, RingMaster, Voice Mail,
an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single
telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving
faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature
should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone
system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information
on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is
crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.

Menu access difficulties
Difficulties
The machine beeps when you try to
access the Setup Receive and
Setup Send menus.

Suggestions
If FAX
is not illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. The Setup Receive
setting (Menu, 2, 1) and Setup Send setting (Menu, 2, 2) are available only when
the machine is in Fax mode.

131

Copy difficulties
Difficulties
Cannot make a copy.

Suggestions
 Make sure that COPY
on page 86.)

is illuminated. (See Entering copy mode

 (For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Vertical black line appears in
copies.

Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the
glass strip, or the corona wire is dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 158 and
Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

Copies are blank.

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Using the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 23 or Using the scanner glass on page 24.)

Printing difficulties
Difficulties
No printout.

Suggestions
 Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.
 Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See
Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
 Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.
(See the Quick Setup Guide.)
 Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.
 Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and
maintenance messages on page 144.)
 Check that the machine is online:
(Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2) Click the Start button and
Devices and Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure
that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows Vista®) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Hardware and
Sound, and then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make
sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
(Windows® XP and Windows Server® 2003/2008) Click the Start button and
choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make
sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
 (For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock settings.

The machine prints unexpectedly
or it prints garbage.

 Pull out the paper tray and wait until the machine stops printing. Then turn off
the machine’s power switch and disconnect from the power for several
minutes. (The machine can be turned off for approximately 60 hours without
losing faxes stored in the memory.)
 Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with
your machine.

The machine prints the first couple
of pages correctly, then some
pages have text missing.

132

 Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with
your machine.
 Your computer is not recognizing the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make
sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup
Guide.)

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Printing difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

The headers or footers appear
when the document displays on the
screen but they do not show up
when it is printed.

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and
bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unprintable area
on page 17.)

The machine is not printing or has
stopped printing.

Press Job Cancel.
As the machine cancels the job and clears it from the memory it may produce an
incomplete printout.

Scanning difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

TWAIN errors appear while
scanning.

Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In
PaperPort™ 11SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN
driver.

OCR does not work.

Try increasing the scanning resolution.

Network scanning does not work.

See Network difficulties on page 134.

Cannot scan.

(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.

Software difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot install software or print.

Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair
and reinstall the software.

Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’
printing.

Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the
same.

The machine does not print from

Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide
on the CD-ROM.)

Adobe® Illustrator®.

Paper handling difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine does not load paper.

 If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.

The LCD shows No Paper or a
Paper Jam message.

 If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled,
you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the
stack over and put it back into the paper tray.
 Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.
 Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.
 Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers
on page 166.
 If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see
Paper jams on page 152.

The machine does not feed paper
from the manual feed slot.

 Make sure that Manual is chosen in the printer driver.
 Make sure the paper or print media is loaded properly in the manual feed slot.
See Loading paper in the manual feed slot on page 13.

133

Paper handling difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

How do I print on envelopes?

You can load envelopes from the manual feed slot. Your application must be set
up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup
or Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for
more information.)

What paper can I use?

You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper,
envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details, see
Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18.)

There is a paper jam.

Clear the jammed paper. (See Paper jams on page 152.)

Print quality difficulties
Difficulties
Printed pages are curled.

Suggestions
 Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the
paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the
paper tray.
 Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you
are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18.)

Printed pages are smeared.

Printouts are too light.

The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,
or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable
paper and other print media on page 18 and Basic tab in the Software User’s
Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, turn
Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save
on page 27.)
 Set Toner Save mode to Off in the Advanced tab in the printer driver. (See
Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the
Enhance Black Printing check box.

Network difficulties
Difficulties

Suggestions

Cannot print over a wired Network.

If you are having Network problems see the Network User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM for more information.
Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in the Ready mode.
Print the Network Configuration list to see your current Network settings. (See
How to print a report on page 83.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify
that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the
machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections
are good, the lower LED of the back panel of the machine will be green.

134

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Network difficulties (continued)
Difficulties

Suggestions

The network scanning feature
does not work.

(Windows®)
If you are using personal firewall software, it may be necessary to set your thirdparty Security/Firewall Software to allow Network scanning. To add port 54925
for Network scanning, enter the information below:
 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.

 In Port number: Enter 54925.
 In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at
http://solutions.brother.com/.
(Macintosh)
 The network scanning feature may not work due to the firewall settings.
Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal
Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the
software manufacturer.
 Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/Device Selector or from
the model list in ControlCenter2.
The network PC-Fax Receive
feature does not work.

(Windows® only)
If you are using personal firewall software, it may be necessary to set your thirdparty Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To add port 54926 for
Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:
 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
 In Port number: Enter 54926.
 In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at
http://solutions.brother.com/.

Your computer cannot find your
machine.

(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary
network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)
(Macintosh) Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located
in Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from
the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.

Other
Difficulties

Suggestions

The machine will not turn on.

Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge)
may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine
off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and turn the machine on.
If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a
different known working outlet and turn on the machine.

135

Improving the print quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (Menu, 4, 2, 3). If the printout looks good,
the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections or try printing a
different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem,
check the following steps first. And then, if you still have a print quality problem, check the chart
below and follow the recommendation.

Check that you use the paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other
print media on page 18.)

Note
To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. (See Recommended
paper and print media on page 18.)

Check that the drum units and toner cartridges are installed properly.

Examples of poor print
quality
White lines, bands or ribbing
across the page

Recommendation
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Colors are light or unclear on
the whole page

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Make sure that you choose the proper media type in the printer driver
or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper
and other print media on page 18 and Basic tab in the Software
User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
 Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)

136

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Examples of poor print
quality
White streaks or bands down
the page

Recommendation
 Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)
 Make sure that foreign material such as a torn piece of paper, sticky
note or dust is not inside the machine and around the drum unit and
toner cartridge.
 Clean all four drum units. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 162.)

Colored streaks or bands down
the page

 Identify the missing color and put in a new toner cartridge. (See
Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

 Clean all four corona wires (one for each color) inside the drum unit
by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires
on page 160.)
 Make sure the corona wire cleaners are at their home positions (a).

 Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the
scanner on page 158.)
 Replace the toner cartridge that matches the color of the streak or
band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Vertical streaks in a light
background

 Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)

137

Examples of poor print
quality
Colored lines across the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation
 If colored lines appear at 1.2 in. (30 mm) intervals, replace the toner
cartridge that matches the color of the line. (See Replacing a Toner
cartridge on page 171.)
 If colored lines appear at 3.7 in. (94 mm) intervals, put in a new drum
unit that matches the color of the line. (See Replacing the drum units
on page 177.)

White spots or hollow print
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit
may be stained. Clean all four drum units. (See Small spots on the
printed pages in Cleaning the drum unit on page 162.)
 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity
can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location
on page 108.)

Completely blank or some
colors are missing
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge
on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Colored spots at 94 mm

94 mm
(3.7 in.)
94 mm
(3.7 in.)

Colored spots at 30 mm

30 mm (1.2 in.)
30 mm (1.2 in.)

138

 If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit
may have glue from a label stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit. (See Large spots on the printed pages on page 163.)
 Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Examples of poor print
quality
Toner scatter or toner stain

Recommendation
 Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity
and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See To
use the product safely on page 111.)
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the
drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

The color of your printouts is
not what you expected

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 167.)
 Adjust the color by using the custom setting in the driver and by using
the control panel of the machine. Colors the machine can print and
colors you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not be
able to reproduce the colors on your monitor.
 If colors appear in the printed gray areas, make sure there is a check
in the Improve Gray Color check box of the printer driver. (See Basic
tab for Windows® printer driver, Advanced tab for Macintosh printer
driver or Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer driver in the
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Gray
Color check box.
 If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing
mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows® printer
driver, Advanced options for Windows® BR-Script printer driver, Print
Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh
BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide on the
CD-ROM.)
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

139

Examples of poor print
quality

Recommendation

All one color

 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Color misregistration

 Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.

 Perform the auto color registration using the control panel (see Auto
Registration on page 168) or perform the manual color registration
using the control panel (see Manual Registration on page 168).
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 181.)

Uneven density appears
periodically across the page

 Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 167.)
 Adjust the contrast or brightness when you are in copy mode. (See
Adjusting Contrast, Color and Brightness on page 89.)
 Identify the color that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for
that color. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.
 Identify the color that is uneven and put in a new drum unit. (See
Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Thin lines do not print

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine
or the printer driver.
 Change the print resolution.
 If you use Windows® printer driver, choose Improve Pattern
Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings of Basic tab. (See
Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

140

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Examples of poor print
quality
Wrinkle

Recommendation
 Change to the recommended type of paper.
 Make sure that the back cover is closed properly.

 Make sure that two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up
position.
 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Offset image

 Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as dry and low
temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See Choosing a
location on page 108.)
 Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.
(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting
tips.

Poor fixing

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 Make sure that two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up
position.
 Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other
Print Options (For Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For
Windows® BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh
printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer
driver) in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, select
Thicker paper in Media Type settings.

141

Examples of poor print
quality
Curled or wavy

Recommendation
 Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do
not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For
Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows®
BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver)
or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the
Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)
 If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the
paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.
Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180 in the paper
tray.
 Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high
temperatures and high humidity.

Uneven density or faded
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Make sure that the envelope lever is pulled down when you are printing
envelopes.

EFGHIJKLMN

ABCDEFG

Envelope creases

142

 Fully open the top cover and then close it again.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Setting Dial Tone detection
Setting the Dial Tone to Detection will
shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.

(USA) Press Menu, 0, 4.
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 5.
Initial Setup
4.Dial Tone

b
c

Telephone line interference/
VoIP

If you are having difficulty sending or
receiving a fax due to possible interference
on the telephone line, we recommend that
you adjust the Equalization for compatibility
to reduce the modem speed for fax
operations.

Press a or b to choose Detection or
No Detection.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.
Miscellaneous
1.Compatibility
Press a or b to choose
Basic(for VoIP), Normal or High.
 Basic(for VoIP) cuts the
modem speed to 9600 bps and turns
the error correction mode (ECM) off.
For a standard telephone line: If you
regularly experience interference on
your standard telephone line try this
setting.
If you are using VoIP: VoIP service
providers offer fax support using
various standards. If you regularly
experience fax transmission errors
try this setting.
 Normal sets the modem speed at
14400 bps.
 High sets the modem speed at
33600 bps.
Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
When you change the Compatibility to
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is
only available for color fax sending.

143

Error and maintenance messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and
shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown
below.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more help,
the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/
Error Message

Cause

Action

Access Error

The device is removed from the
USB direct interface while the
data is processing.

Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try
to print with Direct Print.

Belt End Soon

The belt unit is near the end of its
life.

Buy a new belt unit before you get a
Replace Belt message.

Calibrate

Calibration failed.

Press Black Start or Color Start and try it
again.

(MFC-9325CW only)

 Turn off the machine. Wait a few
seconds, then turn it on again.
 Identify the color causing the problem
and put in a new drum unit. (See
Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
To identify the color of the drum unit, visit
us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view
our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 181.)
 Put in a waste toner box. (See Replacing
the waste toner box on page 185.)
 If the problem continues, call your dealer
or Brother Customer Service.
Cartridge Error
Put the Black (K)
Toner Cartridge
back in. 1
1

144

The toner cartridge
color with the problem
is shown in the
message.

The toner cartridge is not installed
properly.

Take out the drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly for the toner color that is indicated
on the LCD. Remove the toner cartridge and
then re-install it in the drum. Put the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly back into
the machine again.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Error Message

Cause

Action

Cooling Down

The temperature of the drum unit
or toner cartridge is too hot. The
machine will pause its current
print job and go into cooling down
mode. During the cooling down
mode, you will hear the cooling
fan running while the LCD shows
Cooling Down, and
Wait for a while.

Make sure that you can hear the fan in the
machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet
is not blocked by something.

Wait for a while

If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles
that surround the exhaust outlet, and then
leave the machine turned on but do not use
it for several minutes.
If the fan is not spinning do the following:
Disconnect the machine from the power for
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The
machine can be turned off for approximately
4 days without losing faxes stored in the
memory. See Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report on page 150.)

Comm.Error

Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication error.

Connection Fail

You tried to poll a fax machine
Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.
that is not in Polled Waiting mode.

Cover is Open

The ADF cover is not closed
completely.

Close the ADF cover of the machine, then
press Stop/Exit.

The top cover is not closed
completely.

Close the top cover of the machine.

Cover is Open

The fuser cover is not closed
completely or paper was jammed
in the back of the machine when
you turned on the power.

Send the fax again or connect the machine
to another telephone line. If the problem
continues, call the telephone company and
ask them to check your telephone line.

 Close the fuser cover of the machine.
 Make sure paper is not jammed inside
the back of the machine, and then close
the fuser cover and press Black Start or
Color Start.

DIMM Error

The DIMM is not installed
Turn off the machine. Re-install the DIMM
correctly. Or the DIMM is broken. correctly. Wait a few seconds, and then turn
it on again. If this error message appears
again, replace the DIMM with a new one.
(See Installing extra memory on page 126.)

Disconnected

The other person or other
person’s fax machine stopped the
call.

Try to send or receive again.

Document Jam

The document was not inserted
or fed properly, or the document
scanned from the ADF was too
long.

See Document jams on page 151 or Using
the automatic document feeder (ADF)
on page 23.

DR Mode in Use

The machine is set to Distinctive
Ring mode. You cannot change
the Receive Mode from Manual to
another mode.

Set Distinctive Ring to Off. (See Turning off
distinctive ring on page 56.)

145

Error Message

Cause

Action

Drum Error

The corona wire on the drum unit
needs to be cleaned.

Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

It is time to replace the drum
units.

Replace the drum unit with a new one for the
color that is indicated on the LCD. (See
Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

The drum unit is near the end of
its life.

Buy new drum units before you get a
Replace Drums message.

Drums End Soon

Drum End Soon(X) 1 The drum unit for the color
indicated on the LCD is near the
end of its life.

Buy new drum unit for the color indicated on
the LCD before you get a
Replace Drum(X) 1 message.

Fuser Error

The temperature of fuser unit
Turn the power switch off, wait a few
does not rise at a specified
seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the
temperature within specified time. machine for 15 minutes with the power on.
The machine can be turned off for
The fuser unit is too hot.
approximately 60 hours without losing faxes
stored in the memory. (See Transferring your
faxes or Fax Journal report on page 150.)

Init Unable XX

The machine has a mechanical
problem.

 Disconnect the machine from the power
for several minutes, then reconnect it.
(The machine can be turned off for
approximately 60 hours without losing
faxes stored in the memory. See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report on page 150.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

Jam Inside

The paper is jammed inside the
machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

Jam Rear

The paper is jammed in the back
of the machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

Jam Tray

The paper is jammed in the paper
tray of the machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

No Belt Unit

The belt unit is not installed
properly.

Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 181.)

No Paper

The machine is out of paper or
paper is not properly loaded in the
paper tray.

Do one of the following:
 Refill the paper in the paper tray and
press Black Start or Color Start or put
the paper in the manual feed slot.
 Remove the paper and load it again.
Then press Black Start or Color Start.
 If the problem is not solved, the paper
pick-up roller may be stained. Clean the
paper pickup roller. (See Cleaning the
paper pick-up rollers on page 166.)

146

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Error Message

Cause

Action

No Response/Busy

The number you dialed does not
answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

No Toner

The toner cartridge or the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly
is not installed properly.

Re-install the toner cartridge or the drum unit
that is indicated on the LCD.

No Waste Toner

The waste toner box is not
installed properly.

Re-install the waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box on page 185.)

Out of Memory

The machine’s memory is full.

Fax sending or copy operation in
progress
Do one of the following:
 Press Black Start or Color Start to send
or copy the scanned pages.
 Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other
operations in progress finish, and then try
again.
 Clear the data from the memory. (See
Out of memory message on page 45 or
page 92.)
Print operation in process
Do one of the following:
 Reduce print resolution. (See Advanced
tab in the Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.)
 Clear the faxes from the memory. (See
Out of memory message on page 92.)

Print Unable XX

The machine has a mechanical
problem.

Do one of the following:
 Disconnect the machine from the power
for several minutes, then reconnect it.
(The machine can be turned off for
approximately 60 hours without losing
faxes stored in the memory. See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report on page 150.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

Print Unable 1A

One of the issues that can cause
this error is that condensation
may form inside the machine after
a room temperature change.

Turn the power switch off and fully open the
top cover. Leave the machine off and open
for 30 minutes to remove any condensation
from inside the machine, then close the top
cover and turn it on again. If this does not
clear the error, call Brother Customer
Service.

Protected Device

The protect switch of the USB
Flash memory drive is on.

Turn off the protect switch of the USB Flash
memory drive.

(MFC-9325CW only)

147

Error Message

Cause

Action

Registration

Registration failed.

Press Black Start or Color Start and try
again.
Do one of the following:
 Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
 Try Manual Registration, Menu, 4, 7.
(See Manual Registration on page 168.)
 Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 181.)
 If the problem continues, call Brother
Customer Service.

(MFC-9325CW only)

There is already a file on the USB
Flash memory drive with the
same name as the file you are
trying to save.

Change the file name of the file on the USB
Flash memory drive or the file you are trying
to save.

Replace Belt

It is time to replace the belt unit.

Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the
belt unit on page 181.)

Replace Drums

It is time to replace the drum
units.

Replace the drum units.

The drum unit counter was not
reset when a new drum was
installed.

Reset the drum unit counter.

It is time to replace the drum unit
for the indicated color.

Replace the drum unit for the color indicated
on the LCD.

Rename the File

Replace Drum(X) 1

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
(See Resetting the drum counter
on page 181.)

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)
Replace Fuser

It is time to replace the fuser unit. Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the
fuser unit.
To replace Fuser Unit call Brother Customer
Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit us at:
http://www.brother-usa.com/service/

Replace PF Kit

It is time to replace the paper
feeding kit.

Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to replace the
PF Kit.
To replace PF Kit call Brother Customer
Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit us at:
http://www.brother-usa.com/service/

148

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Error Message

Cause

Action

Replace Toner

The toner cartridge is at the end
of its life.

Replace the toner cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a
Toner cartridge on page 171.)

Replace WT Box

It is time to replace the waste
toner box.

Replace the waste toner box. (See
Replacing the waste toner box on page 185.)

Scan Unable XX

The machine has a mechanical
problem.

Short paper

The paper size detected is
shorter than the paper size
defined in the print job and the
paper size being used requires
the back cover to be open.

Open the back cover (back output tray) and
remove any printed pages. Leave the back
cover open and press Black Start or
Color Start.

Size mismatch

The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.

Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the “Paper Size” (Menu, 1, 2, 2 (See
Paper Size on page 25)).

Small paper

The paper size defined in the
printer driver requires the back
cover to be open.

Open the back cover (back output tray) and
press Black Start or Color Start. (See
Printing on thick paper, labels, envelopes or
small paper on page 14.)

Toner Low

The toner cartridge is near the
end of its life.

Buy a new toner cartridge for the color that is
indicated on the LCD before you get a
Replace Toner message.

Too Many Files

There are too many files stored
on the USB Flash memory drive.

Reduce the number of files stored on the
USB Flash memory drive.

An incompatible or broken device
has been connected to the USB
direct interface.

Remove the USB Flash memory drive from
the USB direct interface.

(MFC-9325CW only)
Unusable Device
(MFC-9325CW only)
WT Box End Soon

The waste toner box is almost full. Buy a new waste toner box before you get a
Replace WT Box message.

(X) shows the toner cartridge or drum unit color that is near the end of its life. (K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta,
(C)=Cyan.

149

Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report

Transferring faxes to your PC
C

If the LCD shows:
 Init Unable XX

You can transfer the faxes from your
machine’s memory to your PC.

Make sure that you have installed
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then
turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.
(For details about PC Fax Receive, see
PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Make sure that you have set
PC Fax Receive on the machine.
(See PC Fax Receive on page 74.)
If faxes are in the machine’s memory
when you set up PC Fax Receive, the
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the
faxes to your PC.

Do one of the following:

 Print Unable XX
 Scan Unable XX
We recommend transferring your faxes to
another fax machine or to your PC. (See
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
on page 150 or Transferring faxes to your PC
on page 150.)
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report
to see if there are any faxes you need to
transfer. (See Transferring Fax Journal report
to another fax machine on page 150.)

Note

 To transfer all faxes to your PC,
press 1. You will be asked if you want
a backup print.

If there is an error message on the
machine’s LCD, after the faxes have been
transferred, disconnect the machine from
the power source for several minutes, and
then reconnect it.

Transferring faxes to another fax
machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

a
b

Press Menu, 9, 0, 1.
Do one of the following:
 If the LCD shows No Data, there
are no faxes left in the machine’s
memory. Press Stop/Exit.
 Enter the fax number to which faxes
will be forwarded.

150

Press Black Start or Color Start.

 To exit and leave the faxes in the
memory, press 2.

d
C

Press Stop/Exit.

Transferring Fax Journal report to
another fax machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

a
b

Press Menu, 9, 0, 2.

Press Start.

Enter the fax number to which the Fax
Journal report will be forwarded.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Document jams

If the document is jammed, follow the steps
below.

IMPORTANT
After removing a jammed document,
check that no paper scraps are left in the
machine that could cause another jam.

Document is jammed in the top of the
ADF unit

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

b
c

Open the ADF cover.

Document is jammed under the
document cover

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

b
c

Lift the document cover.

d
e

Close the document cover.

Pull the jammed document out to the
right.

Pull the jammed document out to the
left.

Press Stop/Exit.

Document is jammed at the output
tray

d
e

Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.

Pull the jammed document out to the
right.

Press Stop/Exit.

Close the ADF cover.
Press Stop/Exit.

151

Paper jams
To clear paper jams, please follow the steps
in this section.

IMPORTANT

Paper is jammed in the Paper Tray
If the LCD shows Jam Tray, follow these
steps:

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Use both hands to slowly pull out the
jammed paper.

Please confirm that you have installed all
toner cartridges and drum units in the
machine. Failure to install these items or
improper installation may cause a paper
jam in your Brother machine.

Note
If the error message remains, open and
close the top cover and fuser cover firmly
to reset the machine.

Note
The LCD names for the paper trays are as
follows:
• Standard paper tray: Tray
• Manual Feed Slot: Manual Feed

IMPORTANT
If the paper cannot easily be removed in
this direction, stop and follow the
instructions for Paper is jammed inside the
machine on page 155.

152

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Note
Pulling out the jammed paper downwards
allows you to remove the paper easier.

Press down the green lever and remove
the paper.

Make sure the paper is below the
maximum paper mark (b) of the paper
tray. While pressing the green paperguide release lever, slide the paper
guides to fit the paper size. Make sure
that the guides are firmly in the slots.
(See Loading paper in the standard
paper tray on page 11.)

Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.

Press Black Start or Color Start to
resume printing.

Paper is jammed at the output paper
tray

Push the scanner down with both hands
to close it.

When the paper is jammed at the output
paper tray, follow these steps:

Open the scanner using both hands.

Note
When the top cover is open, you cannot
open the scanner.

153

Paper is jammed at the back of the
machine

c
C

If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam
occurred behind the face-up output tray.
Follow these steps:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Push down and pull the green tabs at
the left and right hand sides toward you
and fold down the fuser cover (1).

Open the back cover.

Using both hands, gently pull the
jammed paper out of the fuser unit.

Close the fuser cover (1).

CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the machine, some
internal parts of the machine will be
extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for
the machine to cool down before continuing
to the next step.

f
g

154

Fully close the back cover.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Paper is jammed inside the machine
If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these
steps:

Take out all the drum unit and toner
cartridge assemblies. Repeat this for all
the drum unit and toner cartridge
assemblies.

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet. Leave the machine turned off for
10 minutes to cool down.

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and toner cartridge assemblies on a
clean, flat surface with a sheet of
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

CAUTION

• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

HOT SURFACE
After you have just used the machine, some
internal parts of the machine will be
extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for
the machine to cool down before continuing
to the next step.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

155

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly into the machine. Make sure
that you match the toner cartridge color
to the same color label on the machine.
Repeat this for all the drum unit and
toner cartridge assemblies.

C
M
Y
K

Pull out the jammed paper slowly.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

f
g

156

Close the top cover.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Routine maintenance

Clean the outside and inside of the machine
regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you
replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit,
make sure that you clean the inside of the
machine. If printed pages are stained with
toner, clean the inside of the machine with a
dry, lint-free cloth.

WARNING

Cleaning the outside of the
machine

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Wipe the outside of the machine with a
dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.

Remove any paper that is in the paper
tray.

Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine
will damage the surface of the machine.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray, or any type of flammable substance
to clean the outside or inside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock. (For more information see
Important safety instructions on page 117.)

Be careful not to inhale toner.

157

Wipe the inside and the outside of the
paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth
to remove dust.

In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)
and the glass strip (2) underneath it with
a soft lint-free cloth moistened with
water.

1
2

Re-load the paper and put the paper tray
firmly back in the machine.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

Cleaning the scanner

Note
C

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Lift the document cover (1).
Clean the white plastic surface (2) and
scanner glass (3) underneath it with a
soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.

1
2
3

158

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

In addition to cleaning the scanner glass
and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water, run your finger tip
over the glass to see if you can feel
anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris,
clean the glass again concentrating on
that area. You may need to repeat the
cleaning process three or four times. To
test, make a copy after each cleaning.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Cleaning the LED heads

WARNING

Wipe the windows of the LED heads (1)
with a dry, lint-free cloth. Be careful not
to touch the windows of the LED
heads (1) with your fingers.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray, or any type of flammable substance
to clean the inside or outside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock. Use neutral detergents.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the windows of the LED
heads with your fingers.

Before you clean the inside of the
machine, turn off the machine’s power
switch. Unplug the telephone line cord
first, and then unplug the power cord
from the AC power outlet.

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

d
e

Close the top cover of the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and then plug
in the telephone line cord.Turn on the
machine’s power switch.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

159

Cleaning the corona wires

Take out the drum unit and toner
cartridge assemblies.

If you have print quality problems, clean the
corona wires as follows:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a
clean, flat surface with a sheet of
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

160

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Clean the primary corona wire inside the
drum unit by gently sliding the green tab
from left to right and right to left several
times.

Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly into the machine. Make sure
that you match the toner cartridge color
to the same color label on the machine.

C
1

Note
Be sure to return the tab to the home
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed
pages may have a vertical stripe.

C
M
Y
K

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

Repeat steps c to e to clean the
remaining corona wires.

g
h

Close the top cover of the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and then
reconnect all cables and telephone line
cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

161

Cleaning the drum unit
Small spots on the printed pages

If your printout has any small white or colored
spots, follow the steps below to solve the
problem.

Open the manual feed slot cover.

Using both hands, slide the manual feed
slot paper guides to the width of the
paper that you are going to use.

Using both hands, put one blank sheet
of paper in the manual feed slot until the
front edge of the paper touches the
paper feed roller. Wait until the machine
automatically feeds the paper. When
you feel the machine pull in the paper,
let go.

Note
• Make sure that the paper is straight and in
the correct position on the manual feed
slot. If it is not, the paper may not be fed
properly, resulting in a paper jam.
• Do not put more than one piece of paper
in the manual feed slot at any one time, as
it may cause a jam.
• If you put paper in the manual feed slot
before the machine is in the Ready mode,
an error may occur and the machine will
stop printing.

Make sure that the machine is in the
Ready mode.
Press Menu, 4, 8.
Drum Cleaning
Press Start

162

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Press Black Start or Color Start. The
machine will pull in the piece of paper
and start cleaning the drum unit.
Drum Cleaning
Please Wait

Large spots on the printed pages

If your printout has colored spots at 3.7 in.
(94 mm) intervals, follow the steps below to
solve the problem.

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first,
disconnect all cables, and then unplug
the power cord from the AC power
outlet.
Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

When the machine has finished
cleaning, Completed appears on the
LCD. Press Stop/Exit so that the
machine returns to the Ready mode.

Repeat steps c to f two more times
using a new blank sheet of paper each
time. Upon completion please discard
the used paper. If the print problem is
not resolved please contact Brother
Customer Service.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

163

See the print sample to identify the color
causing the problem. The color of the
spots is the color of the drum you should
clean. For example, if the spots are
cyan, you should clean the drum for
cyan. Take out the drum unit and toner
cartridge assembly of the color causing
the problem.

Push down the green-labeled lock
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out
of the drum unit.

IMPORTANT
Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

e
IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a
clean, flat surface with a sheet of
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

164

Put the print sample in front of the drum
unit, and find the exact position of the
poor print.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Turn the drum unit gear by hand while
looking at the surface of the OPC
drum (1).

Put the toner cartridge back firmly into
the drum unit until you hear it lock into
place.

When you have found the mark on the
drum that matches the print sample,
wipe the surface of the OPC drum with a
dry cotton swab until the dust or glue on
the surface comes off.

Note
Make sure that you put in the toner
cartridge properly or it may separate from
the drum unit.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT clean the surface of the
photosensitive drum with a sharp object.

165

Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly into the machine. Make sure
that you match the toner cartridge color
to the same color label on the machine.

Cleaning the paper pick-up
rollers
If you have paper feed problems, clean the
pick-up rollers as follows:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.

Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked
in lukewarm water, and then wipe the
separator pad (1) of the paper tray with
it to remove dust.

C
M
Y
K

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

j
k

166

Close the top cover of the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and then
reconnect all cables and telephone line
cord. Turn on the machine’s power
switch.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Wipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside of
the machine to remove dust.

Calibration

The output density for each color may vary
depending on the environment the machine is
in such as temperature and humidity.
Calibration helps you to improve the color
density.

e
f

Put the paper tray back in the machine.
Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet. Turn on the
machine’s power switch.

a
b
c
d
e

Press Menu, 4, 5.
Press a or b to select Calibrate.
Press OK.
Press 1 to select Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.

You can reset the calibration parameters
back to those set at the factory.

a
b
c
d
e

Press Menu, 4, 5.
Press a or b to Reset.
Press OK.
Press 1 to select Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
• If an error message is displayed, press
Stop/Exit and try again. For more
information, see Error and maintenance
messages on page 144.
• If you print using Windows® printer driver,
you need to perform the calibration from
the Windows® printer driver. See
Advanced tab in the Software User's
Guide on the CD-ROM.
• If you print using the Macintosh printer
driver, you need to perform the calibration
using the status monitor. See Status
Monitor in the Software User's Guide on
the CD-ROM. When the Status Monitor
is open, choose Control / Color
Calibration from the menu bar.

167

Auto Registration
Registration

If solid areas of color or images have cyan,
magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the
auto-registration feature to correct the
problem.

a
b

Press Menu, 4, 6, 1.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can set how often the color correction
(Color Calibration and Auto Registration)
occurs. The default setting is Normal. The
color correction process consumes some
amount of the toner.

a
b

To start, press 1.
To exit, press 2.

Manual Registration

c
C

If color still appears incorrectly after autoregistration, you will need to perform manual
registration.

a
b

Press Menu, 4, 7, 1.

When the machine has finished printing
the registration sheet, press 2
(Set Regist.) to correct the color
manually.

Starting at 1 (Magenta) on the chart,
check which colored bar has the most
uniform print density and enter its
number into the machine using the a
and b keys.
Press OK.
Repeat for 2 (Cyan), 3 (Yellow), 4, 5, 6
to 9.

Press Stop/Exit.

168

Frequency (Color Correction)

Press Black Start or Color Start to
start printing the color registration chart.

Press Menu, 4, 9.
Press a or b to choose Normal, Low or
Off.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Replacing the consumable items

The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide
advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To
avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops
printing.
LCD messages

Consumable item
to replace

Approximate life

How to replace

Order No.

Toner Low

Toner cartridge

See page 171.

Prepare New X
Toner Cartridge.

X = Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow,
Black

TN-210BK,
TN-210C,
TN-210M,
TN-210Y

2,200 pages

1,400 pages 1 2
Drums End Soon

4 Drum units

15,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 177.

DR-210CL 5

Drum End Soon(X)

1 Drum unit

15,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 177.

DR-210CL-BK 6,
DR-210CL-CMY 7

X = C, M, Y, K
C = Cyan
M = Magenta
Y = Yellow
K = Black
Belt End Soon

Belt unit

50,000 pages 1

See page 181.

BU-200CL

WT Box End Soon

Waste toner box

50,000 pages 1

See page 185.

WT-200CL

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

Contains 4 pc. Drum Set.

Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit.

Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit.

169

You will need to replace certain parts and clean the machine regularly.
LCD messages

Consumable item
to replace

Approximate life

How to replace

Order No.

Replace Toner

Toner cartridge

See page 171.

TN-210BK,
TN-210C,
TN-210M,
TN-210Y

2,200 pages 1 2

1,400 pages 1 2
Replace Drums

4 Drum units

15,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 177.

DR-210CL 5

Replace Drum(X)

1 Drum unit

15,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 177.

DR-210CL-BK 6,
DR-210CL-CMY 7

X = C, M, Y, K
C = Cyan
M = Magenta
Y = Yellow
K = Black
Drum Error 8

Drum unit

15,000 pages 1 3 4

See page 177.

Replace Belt

Belt unit

50,000 pages 1

See page 181.

BU-200CL

Replace WT Box

Waste toner box

50,000 pages 1

See page 185.

WT-200CL

Replace Fuser

Fuser unit

50,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement fuser unit.

Replace PF Kit

Paper feeding kit

50,000 pages 1

Call your dealer or Brother Customer
Service for a replacement paper feeding
kit 1.

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

Contains 4 pc. Drum Set.

Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit.

Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit.

The Drum Error message has two cases: If the scroll message shows Replace the Drum Unit. you will need
to replace the drum unit. If the scroll message shows Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit. you do not need
to replace the drum unit, you just need to clean the corona wires. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

170

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Note
• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used
consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used
consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally
spilling or scattering the material inside.

• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of
consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.
• The projected life of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of
replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage
and type of media used.

Replacing a Toner cartridge
The Standard toner cartridges can print
approximately 2,200 pages (black) or
approximately 1,400 pages (yellow, magenta,
cyan) 1. Actual page count will vary
depending on your average type of
document. The machine is supplied with a
Starter toner cartridge that will need to be
replaced after approximately 1,000 pages 1.
When a toner cartridge is running low, the
LCD shows Toner Low.
1

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance
with ISO/IEC 19798.

Note
• It is a good idea to keep a new toner
cartridge ready for use when you see the
Toner Low warning.
• To ensure high quality printing, we
recommend that use only Genuine
Brother Brand toner cartridges. When you
want to buy toner cartridges, please call
Brother Customer Service.
• We recommend that you clean the machine
when you replace the toner cartridge. See
Routine maintenance on page 157.
• If you change the print density setting for
lighter or darker printing, the amount of
toner used will change.
• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until
immediately before you put it into the
machine.

Toner Low message

Toner Low
Prepare...
If the LCD shows Toner Low
Prepare New X Toner Cartridge., the
machine has nearly run out of toner. Buy a
new toner cartridge and have it ready before
you get a Replace Toner message. The
LCD shows the toner color that is near the
end of its life (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or
Black).

Replace Toner message

When the following message appears on the
LCD, you need to replace the toner cartridge:
Replace Toner
The scrolling message on the LCD indicates
which color you need to replace.

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first, and
then unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

171

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

Push down the green-labeled lock
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out
of the drum unit.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

Take out the drum unit and toner
cartridge assembly for the color shown
on the LCD.

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It
could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray or any type of flammable substance
to clean the inside or outside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock. See Routine maintenance
on page 157 for how to clean the machine.
Be careful not to inhale toner.

172

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

IMPORTANT
• We recommend that you place the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a
clean, flat, level, stable surface with a
sheet of disposable paper or cloth
underneath it in case you accidentally spill
or scatter toner.
• To prevent damage to the machine from
static electricity, DO NOT touch the
electrodes shown in the illustration.

C
Note
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Go to
http://www.brother.com/original/index.html
for instructions on how to return your used
consumable items to the Brother
collection program. If you choose not to
return your used consumable, please
discard the used consumable according to
local regulations, keeping it separate from
domestic waste. If you have questions,
call your local waste disposal office.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Clean the primary corona wire inside the
drum unit by gently sliding the green tab
from left to right and right to left several
times.

Note
Be sure to return the tab to the home
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed
pages may have a vertical stripe.

173

Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently
shake it from side to side several times
to distribute the toner evenly inside the
cartridge.

IMPORTANT
• Wait to unpack the new toner cartridge
until immediately before you put it in the
machine. If a toner cartridge is left
unpacked for a long time, the toner life will
be shortened.
• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct
sunlight or room light, the unit may be
damaged.

CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit
immediately after you have removed the
protective cover. To prevent any
degradation to the print quality, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

174

IMPORTANT
Brother strongly recommends that you
DO NOT refill the toner cartridge provided
with your machine. We also strongly
recommend that you continue to use only
Genuine Brother Brand replacement toner
cartridges. Use or attempted use of
potentially incompatible toner and/or
cartridges in the Brother machine may
cause damage to the machine and/or may
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our
warranty coverage does not apply to any
problem that is caused by the use of
unauthorized third party toner and/or
cartridges. To protect your investment and
obtain premium performance from the
Brother machine, we strongly recommend
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.

Pull off the protective cover.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Put the new toner cartridge firmly into
the drum unit until you hear it lock into
place.

C
M
Y
K

C
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black
h

Close the top cover of the machine.

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and the telephone line cord.
Turn on the machine’s power switch.

Note
Make sure that you put in the toner
cartridge properly or it may separate from
the drum unit.

Slide the drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly into the machine. Make sure
that you match the toner cartridge color
to the same color label on the machine.

Note
DO NOT turn off the machine’s power
switch or open the top cover until the LCD
returns to the Ready mode.

IMPORTANT
While removing the drum unit, handle it
carefully because it may contain toner. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

175

Drum units
Order No. DR-210CL 4 pc. Drum Set or single
drums DR-210CL-BK, DR-210CL-CMY
A new drum unit can print approximately
15,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.
DR-210CL Drum Set contains 4 drum units
1 Black (DR-210CL-BK) and 3 Color
(DR-210CL-CMY). DR-210CL-BK contains
1 Black drum. DR-210CL-CMY contains
1 Color drum.
Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and
rotation of the drum and interaction with
paper, toner and other materials in the paper
path. In designing this product, Brother
decided to use the number of rotations of the
drum as a reasonable determinant of the
drum life. When a drum reaches the
factory-established rotation limit
corresponding to the rated page yield, the
product LCD display will advise you to
replace the applicable drum(s). The product
will continue to function; however, print
quality may not be optimal.
As the drums rotate in unison during the
various stages of operation (regardless of
whether toner is deposited on the page) and
because damage to a single drum unit is not
likely, you will need to replace all of the drums
at once (unless you have replaced an
individual drum [DR-210CL-BK for black and
DR-210CL-CMY for Color] for reasons other
than reaching its rated life). For your
convenience, Brother sells the drum units as
a set of four (DR-210CL).

176

Note
• There are many factors that determine the
actual drum life, such as the temperature,
humidity, type of paper, type of toner used
and so on. Under ideal conditions, the
average drum life is estimated at
approximately 15,000 pages. The actual
number of pages that your drum will print
may be significantly less than this
estimate. Because we have no control
over the many factors that determine the
actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a
minimum number of pages that will be
printed by your drum.
• For best performance, use only genuine
Brother toner. The machine should be
used only in a clean, dust-free
environment with adequate ventilation.
• Printing with a third-party drum unit may
reduce not only the print quality but also
the quality and life of the machine itself.
Warranty coverage does not apply to
problems caused by the use of a
third-party drum unit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Drum End Soon messages

Drums End Soon

Replace the Drum Unit. Black/
Cyan/ Magenta/ Yellow. Refer to
the User’s Guide. 1

If the LCD shows Drums End Soon, it
means the 4 drum units are near the end of
their life. Buy a new drum unit set
(DR-210CL) and have it ready before you get
a Replace Drums message. To replace the
drum units, see Replacing the drum units
on page 177.

The Drum Error message has two cases: If
the scrolling message shows
Replace the Drum Unit. you will need
to replace the drum unit. If the scrolling
message shows
Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit.
you do not need to replace the drum unit, you
just need to clean the corona wires. (See
Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

Drum End Soon(X)
If only a specified drum is near the end of its
life, the LCD shows the Drum End Soon(X)
message. (X) indicates the drum unit color
that is near the end of its life. ((K) =Black,
(Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta, (C)=Cyan). Buy a
new drum unit DR-210CL-BK (for Black) or a
DR-210CL-CMY (for either Y, M, C colors)
and have it ready before you get a
Replace Drums message. To replace the
drum units, see Replacing the drum units
on page 177.

Replace Drums messages
When the following message appears on the
LCD, you need to replace the drum units:
Replace Drums
If only the specified drum needs to be
replaced, the LCD shows the
Replace Drum(X) message. (X) indicates
the drum unit color that you need to replace.
((K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta,
(C)=Cyan).

Only the color you need to replace will be shown

Replacing the drum units

IMPORTANT
• While removing the drum unit, handle it
carefully because it may contain toner. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• Every time you replace the drum unit,
clean the inside of the machine. (See
Routine maintenance on page 157.)

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first, and
then unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

Drum Error

177

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

Push down the green-labeled lock
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out
of the drum unit.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

Take out the drum unit and toner
cartridge assembly for the color shown
on the LCD.

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It
could explode, resulting in injuries.
DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of
spray, or any type of flammable substance
to clean the outside or inside of the
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock. See Routine maintenance
on page 157 for how to clean the machine.
Be careful not to inhale toner.

178

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

C
Note
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.

• Go to
http://www.brother.com/original/index.html
for instructions on how to return your used
consumable items to the Brother
collection program. If you choose not to
return your used consumable, please
discard the used consumable according to
local regulations, keeping it separate from
domestic waste. If you have questions,
call your local waste disposal office.

Unpack the new drum unit and remove
the protective cover.

IMPORTANT
Wait to unpack the new drum unit until
immediately before you put it in the
machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or
room light may damage the drum unit.

179

Put the toner cartridge firmly into the
new drum unit until you hear it lock into
place.

Slide the drum unit and toner cartridge
assembly into the machine. Make sure
that you match the toner cartridge color
to the same color label on the machine.

IMPORTANT

M
Y
K

Make sure that you put in the toner
cartridge properly or it may separate from
the drum unit.
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

180

Close the top cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Resetting the drum counter

When you replace a drum unit with a new
one, you need to reset the drum counter by
completing the following steps:

Replace Belt message

When the following message appears on the
LCD, you need to replace the belt unit:
Replace Belt

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.
(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.

Press a or b to choose the color of the
drum you replaced. Press OK.

d
e

Press 1 to reset the drum unit counter.

IMPORTANT
• DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.
If you touch it, it could degrade print
quality.
• Damage caused by incorrect handling of
the belt unit may void your warranty.

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first, and
then unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

Press Stop/Exit.

Replacing the belt unit

Order No. BU-200CL
A new belt unit can print approximately
50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Belt End Soon message

1
C

Belt End Soon
If the LCD shows Belt End Soon, it means
the belt unit is near the end of its life. Buy a
new belt unit and have it ready before you get
a Replace Belt message.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

181

Take out all the drum unit and toner
cartridge assemblies.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

182

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the belt unit
and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustration.

183

Unpack the new belt unit and put the
new belt unit in the machine.

C
M
Y
K

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

184

Close the top cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

When you replace a belt unit with a new
one, you need to reset the belt unit
counter by completing the following
steps:

Replace WT Box message

When the following message appears on the
LCD, you need to replace the waste toner box:
C

Replace WT Box

Plug the machine’s power cord back into
the AC power outlet first, and reconnect
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn
on the machine’s power switch.

(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.
(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.

Press a or b to select Belt Unit.
Press OK.

d
e

Press 1 to reset the belt unit counter.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.

WARNING
DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.
It could explode.

Press Stop/Exit.

Replacing the waste toner box

Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT
inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.

Order No. WT-200CL
A new waste toner box can print
approximately 50,000 A4 or Letter size
single-sided pages.

WT Box End Soon message

Turn off the machine’s power switch.
Unplug the telephone line cord first, and
then unplug the power cord from the AC
power outlet.

Fully open the top cover by lifting up on
the handle (1).

WT Box End Soon
If the LCD shows WT Box End Soon, it
means the waste toner box is near the end of
its life. Buy a new waste toner box and have
it ready before you get a Replace WT Box
message.

IMPORTANT
When the scanner is open, you cannot
open the top cover.

185

Take out all the drum unit and toner
cartridge assemblies.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

186

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustrations.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Hold the green handle of the belt unit
and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT
touch the shaded parts shown in the
illustration.

187

Remove the orange packing material
and discard it.

Hold the green handle of the waste toner
box and remove the waste toner box
from the machine.

CAUTION
Handle the waste toner box carefully in
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
If toner scatters on your hands or clothes,
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

Note

Note
This step is only necessary when you are
replacing the waste toner box for the first
time. The orange packing is installed at
the factory to protect your machine during
shipment. The orange packing is not
required for replacement waste toner
boxes.

188

Discard the used waste toner box
according to local regulations, keeping it
separate from domestic waste. If you have
questions, call your local waste disposal
office.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Unpack the new waste toner box and
put the new waste toner box in the
machine.

Put the belt unit in the machine.

C
M
Y
K
h

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

Close the top cover of the machine.

189

Replacing periodic
maintenance parts
The periodic maintenance parts will need to
be replaced regularly to maintain the print
quality. The parts listed below will have to be
replaced after printing approximately
50,000 pages 1. Please call Brother
Customer Service when the following
messages appear on the LCD.
1

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Machine Information
C

Checking the Serial Number

You can see the machine’s Serial Number on
the LCD.

(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 1.
(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 1.
Machine Info.
1.Serial No.

Press Stop/Exit.

LCD message

Description

Replace PF Kit

Replace the paper feeding kit
for the paper tray.

Checking the Page Counters

Replace Fuser

Replace the fuser unit.

You can see the machine’s Page Counters
for copies, printed pages, reports and lists,
faxes or a summary total.

(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 2.
(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 2.
Machine Info.
2.Page Counter

190

Press a or b to see Total, Fax/List,
Copy or Print.

Press Stop/Exit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Checking the remaining life of
parts
You can see the machine’s parts life on the
LCD.

(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 3.
(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 3.
Machine Info.
3.Parts Life

Press a or b to choose 1.Drum,
2.Belt Unit, 3.PF Kit or
4.Fuser.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.

Note
The life check will be accurate only if you
have reset the part counter when you
installed a new part. It will not be accurate
if that part’s life counter was reset during
the life of the used part.

Reset functions
C

The following reset functions are available:
1 Network
You can reset the print server back to its
default factory settings such as the
password and IP address information.
2 Address & Fax
Address & Fax resets the following
settings:
 Address Book
(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup
Groups)
 Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)
 Station ID
(name and number)
 Coverpage Msg
(comments)
 Remote Fax Option
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,
Fax Forwarding, Paging and PC-Fax)
 Report settings
(Transmission Verification Report/Tel
Index List/Fax Journal)
 Setting Lock password
3 All Settings
You can reset all the machine settings
back to the settings that were set at the
factory.
Brother strongly recommends you
perform this operation when you dispose
of the machine.

Note
Unplug the interface cable before you
choose Network or All Settings.

191

How to reset the machine

(USA) Press Menu, 0, 6.
(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 7.
Initial Setup
6.Reset

Press a or b to choose the reset function
you want to use.
Press OK.

Do one of the following;

Packing and shipping
the machine
When you transport the machine, use the
packing materials that came with your
machine. If you do not pack the machine
properly, you could void your warranty. The
machine should be adequately insured with
the carrier.

CAUTION

 To reset the settings, press 1 and go
to step d.

When shipping the machine, each DRUM
UNIT / TONER CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY
and the WASTE TONER BOX must be
removed from the machine and put in a
plastic bag. Failure to remove these items
and put them in plastic bags before
shipping may cause severe damage to the
machine and may VOID THE WARRANTY.

 To exit without making changes,
press 2 and go to step e.

You will be asked to reboot the machine.
Do one of the following;
 To reboot the machine press 1. The
machine will begin the reset.
 To exit without rebooting the
machine, press 2. Go to step e.

Make sure that you have the following parts
for repacking:

Press Stop/Exit.

Note
You can also reset the Network settings
by pressing Menu, 7, 0 (for
MFC-9325CW) or Menu, 5, 0 (for
MFC-9125CN).

2
3

192

Plastic bags - to be supplied by you, the
user; one for the waste toner box, and one
each for the four drum and toner cartridge
assemblies

Protective covers that were attached to the
original drum and toner cartridge
assemblies

Packing material for locking the belt unit

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

WARNING
This machine is heavy and weighs
approximately 50.5 lb. (22.9 kg). To prevent
injuries use at least two people to lift the
machine. Be careful not to pinch your fingers
when you put the machine back down.

CAUTION
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in
the illustration.

IMPORTANT
If you pack the machine soon after turning
off the power make sure the machine has
cooled down completely.

a
b

Turn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug all the cables and AC power
cord from the machine.

Fully open the top cover and take out all
the drum unit and toner cartridge
assemblies.

Unplug the machine from the telephone
wall jack.

193

Attach the protective cover to each of
the drum unit and toner cartridge
assemblies.

Put each assembly into a plastic bag
and completely seal each bag.

Remove the belt unit by holding the
green handle and lifting the belt unit up
and out of the machine.

Remove the waste toner box from the
machine, and then put it in a plastic bag
and seal the bag completely.

Reinstall the belt unit back in the
machine.

h
h

194

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

Reinstall the original packing material in
the machine.

Put the machine and the Styrofoam
pieces into the carton. Match the front
side of the machine to the “FRONT”
mark on the Styrofoam pieces. Put the
Styrofoam pieces for the drum unit and
toner cartridge assemblies on the top of
the machine.

Close the top cover.

Put the waste toner box and one drum
unit and toner cartridges assembly in
the Styrofoam piece.

Using two people, place the machine
into the plastic bag.

Put the power cord, and the three
remaining drum unit and toner cartridge
assemblies into the Styrofoam pieces as
shown in the illustration.

195

Put the four carton trays on the top.

Note
If you are returning your machine to
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,
pack only the machine. Keep all separate
parts, including the drum unit and toner
cartridge assemblies, and printed
materials to use with your ‘Exchange’
machine.

196

Close the carton and tape it shut.

Menu and features

On-screen
programming

Menu keys

Your machine has been designed to be easy
to use. The LCD provides on-screen
programming using the menu keys.
We have created step by step on-screen
instructions to help you program your
machine. Simply follow the steps as they
guide you through the menu selections and
programming options.

Menu table

Access the menu.
D

You can program your machine by using the
Menu table on page 199. These pages list
the menu selections and options.

Go to the next menu level.
Accept an option.

Press Menu followed by the menu numbers
to program your machine.

Exit the menu by pressing
repeatedly.

For example, to set Beeper volume to Low:

a
b
c

Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.

Go back to the previous
menu level.

Press a or b to choose Low.

Scroll through the current
menu level.

Press OK.

Memory storage
Your menu settings are stored permanently,
and in the event of a power failure will not be
lost. Temporary settings (for example,
Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also,
during a power failure the machine will retain
the date and time and any fax messages that
are in the memory for approximately
60 hours.

Go back to the previous
menu level or forward to the
next menu level.

Exit the menu or stop the
current operation.

197

How to access the menu
mode

a
b

Press Menu.
Choose an option.
MFC-9125CN:
 Press 1 for General Setup menu.
 Press 2 for Fax menu.
 Press 3 for Copy menu.
 Press 4 for Printer menu.
 Press 5 for Network menu.
 Press 6 for Machine Info. menu.
 Press 9 for Service menu. 1
 Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.
MFC-9325CW:
 Press 1 for General Setup menu.
 Press 2 for Fax menu.
 Press 3 for Copy menu.
 Press 4 for Printer menu.
 Press 5 for USB Direct I/F menu.
 Press 6 for Print Reports menu.
 Press 7 for Network menu.
 Press 8 for Machine Info. menu.
 Press 9 for Service menu. 1
 Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.
1

This will appear only when the LCD shows an
error message.

You can also scroll through each menu
level by pressing a or b for the direction
you want.

Press OK when the option you want
appears on the LCD.
The LCD will then show the next menu
level.

Press a or b to scroll to your next menu
selection.

198

Press OK.
When you have finished setting an
option, the LCD will show Accepted.

Press Stop/Exit to exit Menu mode.

Menu and features

Menu table

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Choose & OK

Choose & OK

to accept

to exit

D
Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

1.General
Setup

1.Mode Timer

—

0 Sec

Sets the time to
return to Fax mode
and the time the
machine will change
from individual user
to public user when
using Secure
Function Lock.

Sets the type of
paper in the paper
tray.

Sets the size of the
paper in the paper
tray.

—

30 Secs
1 Min
2 Mins*
5 Mins
Off
2.Paper

1.Paper Type

Thin
Plain*

Page

Thick
Thicker
Recycled Pap
er
2.Paper Size

A4
Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio

199

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

1.General
Setup

3.Volume

1.Ring

Off

Adjusts the ring
volume.

Adjusts the volume
level of the beeper.

Adjusts the speaker
volume.

Changes for Daylight
Savings Time
automatically.

Increases the page
yield of the toner
cartridge.

Conserves power.

Adjusts the contrast
of the LCD.

—

Stops unauthorized
users from most
operations except
receiving faces into
the memory.

—

Can restrict selected
machine operation
for up to 25 individual
users and all other
non-authorized
Public users.

—

Stops unauthorized
users from changing
the machine’s
current settings.

Low

(Continued)

Page

Med*
High
2.Beeper

Off
Low
Med*
High

3.Speaker

Off
Low
Med*
High

4.Auto Daylight

—

On
Off*

5.Ecology

1.Toner Save

On
Off*

2.Sleep Time

Range varies
depending on
model.
005Min*

6.LCD Contrast

—

b-nnnno+a
b-nnnon+a
b-nnonn+a*
b-nonnn+a
b-onnnn+a

7.Security

1.Memory Security
(MFC-9125CN only)

1.Function Lock
(MFC-9325CW only)

2.Setting Lock

200

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

1.General
Setup

8.Document Scan

1.Glass ScanSize

Adjusts the scan
area of the scanner
glass to the size of
the document.

You can set your own
default settings of the
data compression
rate.

See
Software
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

Letter*

(Continued)
2.File Size

1.Color

Small
Middle*
Large

2.Gray

Small

Page

Middle*

Large

201

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

2.Fax

1.Setup Receive

1.Ring Delay

Sets the number of
rings before the
machine answers in
Fax Only or Fax/Tel
mode.

Sets the
pseudo/double-ring
time in Fax/Tel mode.

Receives fax
messages without
pressing Start.

Allows you to answer
all calls at an
extension or external
telephone and use
codes to turn the
machine on or off.
You can personalize
these codes.

Cuts the size of
incoming faxes.

Makes printouts
darker or lighter.

(In Fax mode only)

01
02
03

Page

04*
2.F/T Ring Time

20 Secs*
30 Secs
40 Secs
70 Secs

3.Easy Receive

On*
Off

4.Remote Codes

On* (l51, #51)
Off

5.Auto Reduction

On*
Off

6.Print Density

b -onn+ a
b -non+ a*
b -nno+ a

7.Polling RX

—

Sets up your machine
to poll another fax
machine.

8.Fax Rx Stamp

Prints the received
time and date on the
top of the received
faxes.

Changes the
lightness or darkness
of faxes you send.

Sets the default
resolution for
outgoing faxes.

Off*

2.Setup Send

1.Contrast

(In Fax mode only)

Auto*
Light
Dark

2.Fax Resolution

Standard*
Fine
S.Fine
Photo

202

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

2.Fax

2.Setup Send

3.Delayed Fax

—

(Continued)

(In Fax mode only)

Sets the time of day in
24 hour format that
the delayed faxes will
be sent.

4.Batch TX

Combines delayed
faxes going to the
same fax number at
the same time of day
into one transmission.

Sends a fax without
using the memory.

Sets up your machine
with a document to be
retrieved by another
fax machine.

Automatically sends a
cover page you have
programmed.

(Continued)

Off*

5.Real Time TX

Next Fax:On
Next Fax:Off

Page

On
Off*
6.Polled TX

On
Off*

7.Coverpg Setup

Next Fax:On*
Next Fax:Off
On
Off
Print Sample

8.Coverpage Msg

—

Sets up your own
comments for the fax
cover page.

9.Overseas Mode

If you are having
difficulty sending
faxes overseas, set
this to On.

Off*
3.Address Book

1.One Touch Dial

—

Stores up to 8 One
Touch Dial numbers,
so you can dial by
pressing one key
(and Start).

2.Speed Dial

—

Stores up to 200
Speed Dial numbers,
so you can dial by
pressing only a few
keys (and Start).

3.Setup Groups

—

Sets up to 20 Group
numbers for
Broadcasting.

203

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

2.Fax

4.Report Setting

1.Transmission

Sets initial setup for
Transmission
Verification Report.

Sets the interval for
automatic printing of
the Fax Journal.

Sets the machine to
forward fax
messages, to call
your pager, to store
incoming faxes in the
memory (so you can
retrieve them while
you are away from
your machine), or to
send faxes to your
PC.

(Continued)

On+Image

Page

Off*
Off+Image
2.Journal Period

Off
Every 50 Faxes*
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days

5.Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

Off*
Fax Forward
Paging
Fax Storage
PC Fax Receive

(Backup Print)

6.Dial Restrict.

If you choose
Fax Forward or PC
Fax Receive, you can
turn on the safety
feature Backup Print.

2.Remote Access

---l

Sets your own code
for Remote Retrieval.

3.Print Fax

—

Prints incoming faxes
stored in the memory.

1.Dial Pad

Off*

You can set the
machine to restrict
dialing when using
the dial pad.

You can set the
machine to restrict
the dialing of
One Touch numbers.

You can set the
machine to restrict
the dialing of Speed
Dial numbers.

You can check which
jobs are in the
memory and lets you
cancel scheduled
jobs.

Enter # twice
On
2.One Touch Dial

Off*
Enter # twice
On

3.Speed Dial

Off*
Enter # twice
On

7.Remaining Jobs

204

—

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

2.Fax

0.Miscellaneous

1.Compatibility

High*

Adjusts the
equalization for
transmission
difficulties.

(Continued)

Normal
Basic(for VoIP)

Page
143

VoIP service
providers offer fax
support using various
standards. If you
regularly experience
fax transmission
errors, choose
Basic(for VoIP).
2.Distinctive

Off*
Set

3.Caller ID

Display#
Print Report

3.Copy

1.Quality

—

Text
Photo
Auto*

2.Brightness

—

b -nnnno+ a
b -nnnon+ a

Uses the telephone
company’s Distinctive
Ring subscriber
service to register the
ring pattern with the
machine.

View or print a list of
the last 30 Caller IDs
stored in the memory.

You can choose the
Copy resolution for
your type of
document.

Adjust the brightness
for copies.

Adjusts the contrast
for copies.

b -nnonn+ a*
b -nonnn+ a
b -onnnn+ a
3.Contrast

—

b -nnnno+ a
b -nnnon+ a
b -nnonn+ a*
b -nonnn+ a
b -onnnn+ a

You can change to
the higher Copy
resolution when you
make a text copy with
100% ratio using the
scanner glass.

205

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

3.Copy

4.Color Adjust

1.Red

b -nnnno+ a

Adjusts the red color
for copies.

(Continued)

b -nnnon+ a

Page
90

b -nnonn+ a*
b -nonnn+ a
b -onnnn+ a
2.Green

b -nnnno+ a
b -nnnon+ a

Adjusts the green
color for copies.

b -nnonn+ a*
b -nonnn+ a
b -onnnn+ a
3.Blue

b -nnnno+ a
b -nnnon+ a

Adjusts the blue color
for copies.

b -nnonn+ a*
b -nonnn+ a
b -onnnn+ a
4.Printer

1.Emulation

—

Auto*
HP LaserJet

Chooses the
emulation mode.

BR-Script 3

2.Print Options

1.Internal Font

1.HP LaserJet
2.BR-Script 3

2.Configuration

3.Output Color

—

Prints a test page.

Auto*

Chooses color or
black & white printed
documents. If you
choose Auto, the
machine selects a
suitable option for the
document (color or
B&W).

—

1.Reset
2.Exit

5.Calibration

—

Calibrate
Reset

206

Prints a list of the
machine’s printer
settings.

—

B&W

4.Reset Printer

Prints a list of the
machine’s internal
fonts.

3.Test Print

Color

See
Software
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

Restores the printer
settings to the original
factory default
settings.
Adjusts the color
density or returns the
color calibration to the
factory settings.

167

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

4.Printer

6.Auto Regist.

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

1.Start

Adjust the print
position of each color
automatically.

168

(Continued)

Page

2.Exit
7.Manual Regist.

1.Print Chart

—

Print the chart to
manually check the
registration of the
colors.

2.Set Regist.

1 Magenta

Sets the correction
value on the chart you
printed from
Print Chart.

2 Cyan
3 Yellow

4 Magenta
5 Cyan
6 Yellow
7 Magenta
8 Cyan
9 Yellow
8.Drum Cleaning

—

Carry out cleaning the
drum unit to improve
the print quality
problem.

162

9.Frequency

—

Normal*

Sets the interval time
you want to carry out
the auto registration
and the calibration.

168

Sets the paper size
when printing directly
from the USB flash
memory drive.

Sets the media type
when printing directly
from the USB flash
memory drive.

Low
Off
5.USB Direct I/F

1.Direct Print

1.Paper Size

(MFC-9325CW
only)

A4
Letter*
Legal
Executive
A5
A5 L
A6
B5
B6
Folio

2.Media Type

Thin
Plain*
Thick
Thicker
Recycled Paper

207

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

5.USB Direct
I/F

1.Direct Print

3.Multiple Page

1in1*

Sets the page style
when printing multiple
pages directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

100

Sets the page
orientation when
printing directly from
the USB Flash
memory drive.

100

Enables or disables
the page collation
when printing directly
from the USB Flash
memory drive.

100

Sets the print quality
option when printing
directly from the USB
Flash memory drive.

100

Sets the PDF option
whether to print
comments (Markup)
or stamps in the PDF
file along with the text.

100

Sets the index print
option, simple format
or details.

100

Sets the resolution to
send the scanned
data to USB Flash
memory drive.

See
Software
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

(Continued)

2in1

(MFC-9325CW
only)

4in1
9in1

(Continued)

Page

16in1
25in1
1 in 2x2 pages
1 in 3x3 pages
1 in 4x4 pages
1 in 5x5 pages
4.Orientation

Portrait*
Landscape

5.Collate

On*
Off

6.Print Quality

Normal*
Fine

7.PDF Option

Document*
Document&Marku
p
Document&Stamp
s

8.Index Print

Simple*
Details

2.Scan to USB

1.Resolution

Color 100 dpi*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dp
i

2.File Name

208

—

Enter the file name of
the scanned data.

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

5.USB Direct
I/F

3.PictBridge

1.Paper Size

Letter*

Sets the paper size
when printing data
from a camera with
using PictBridge.

(MFC-9325CW
only)

Page
94

(Continued)

B6
A6
2.Orientation

Letter
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
Then, you will
choose
Portrait

Sets the page
orientation when
printing data from a
camera using
PictBridge, If you
choose the paper size
Letter, A4, or B5,
Portrait will be
chosen. If you choose
A5, B6 or A6,
Landscape will be
chosen.

Landscape
3.Date & Time

On
Off*

4.File Name

On
Off*

5.Print Quality

Normal*
Fine

Prints the date and
time the photo is
being taken on the
photo.
Prints the file name of
the data on the photo.
Sets the print quality
option when printing
data from a camera
using PictBridge.

209

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

6.Print Reports
(MFC-9325CW)

1.Transmission

1.View on LCD

—

2.Print Report

—

You can view the
Transmission
Verification Report for
your last 200
outgoing faxes and
print the last report.

2.Help List

—

Prints the Help List so
you can see at-aglance how to quickly
program your
machine.

3.Tel Index List

1.Numeric

—
—

Lists names and
numbers stored in the
One Touch and
Speed Dial memory,
in numerical or
alphabetical order.

2.Alphabetic

4.Fax Journal

—

Lists information
about your last 200
incoming and
outgoing faxes. (TX
means Transmit. RX
means Receive.)

5.User Settings

—

Lists your settings.

6.Network Config

—

Lists your Network
settings.

210

Page

Menu and features

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

5.Network
(MFC-9125CN)

1.TCP/IP

1.Boot Method

Auto*

Chooses the BOOT
method that best
suits your needs.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
2.IP Address

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

3.Subnet Mask

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet
mask.

4.Gateway

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway
address.

5.Node Name

BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node
name.

6.WINS Config

Auto*

Chooses the WINS
configuration mode.

Static
7.WINS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
WINS server.

Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
8.DNS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
DNS server.

Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
9.APIPA

On*
Off

0.IPv6

On
Off*

2.Ethernet

—

Auto*
100B-FD

Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.
Enable or Disable the
IPv6 protocol. If you
want to use the IPv6
protocol, visit
http://solutions.
brother. com/ for
more information.
Chooses the
Ethernet link mode.

100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD

211

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

5.Network

3.Scan to
FTP

—

Color 100 dpi*

Chooses the file
format to send the
scanned data via
FTP.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

(MFC-9125CN)

Color 200 dpi

(Continued)

Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
4.Scan to
Network

—

Color 100 dpi*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi

You can scan a black
and white or color
document directly to
a CIFS server on
your local network or
on the internet.

Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
5.Time Zone

—

UTCXXX:XX

Sets the time zone
for your country.

0.Network
Reset

1.Reset

1.Yes

Restore all network
settings to factory
default.

2.No
2.Exit

212

—

Menu and features

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

7.Network

1.Wired LAN

1.TCP/IP

1.Boot Method

(MFC-9325CW)

Options

Descriptions

Page

Auto*

Chooses the BOOT
method that best
suits your needs.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
2.IP Address

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

3.Subnet Mask

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet
mask.

4.Gateway

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway
address.

5.Node Name

BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node
name.

6.WINS Config

Auto*

Chooses the WINS
configuration mode.

Static
7.WINS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
WINS server.

Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
8.DNS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
DNS server.

Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
9.APIPA

On*
Off

0.IPv6

On
Off*

213

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

7.Network

1.Wired LAN

2.Ethernet

(MFC-9325CW )

(Continued)

—

Options

Descriptions

Page

Auto*

Chooses the
Ethernet link mode.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

100B-FD

(Continued)

100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD

2.WLAN

3.Set to De
fault

—

4.Wired Ena
ble

—

1.TCP/IP

1.Boot Method

1.Reset
2.Exit
On*
Off
Auto*
Static

Restore the wired
network setting to
factory default.
Enable or Disable the
Wired LAN manually.
Chooses the BOOT
method that best
suits your needs.

RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
2.IP Address

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

3.Subnet Mask

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet
mask.

4.Gateway

[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway
address.

5.Node Name

BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node
name.

6.WINS Config

Auto*

Chooses the WINS
configuration mode.

Static
7.WINS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
WINS server.

Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
8.DNS Server

Primary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]
Secondary
[000-255]. [000-255].
[000-255]. [000-255]

214

Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
DNS server.

Menu and features

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

7.Network

2.WLAN

1.TCP/IP

(MFC-9325CW )

(Continued)

9.APIPA

Options

Descriptions

Page

On*

Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

Off

(Continued)

0.IPv6

On
Off*

2.Setup Wiz
ard

1.On

3.SES/WPS/A
OSS

1.On

4.WPS w/PIN
Code

1.On

5.WLAN Stat
us

1.Status

Enable or Disable the
IPv6 protocol. If you
want to use the IPv6
protocol, visit
http://solutions.
brother.com/ for
more information.

—

You can configure
your print server.

—

You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using the
one-button push
method.

—

You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using WPS
with a PIN code.

Active(11b)

You can see the
current wireless
network status.

2.Off
2.Off

2.Off

Active(11g)

Wired LAN Active
WLAN OFF
AOSS Active
Connection Fail
2.Signal

Strong
Medium
Weak

You can see the
current wireless
network signal
strength.

None
3.SSID

—

You can see the
current SSID.

4.Comm. Mode

Ad-hoc

You can see the
current
Communication
Mode.

Infrastructure

215

Main
Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

7.Network

2.WLAN
(Continued)

6.Set to De
fault

—

(MFC-9325CW)

7.WLAN Enable

—

(Continued)

Options

Descriptions

Page

1.Reset

Restore the wireless
network settings to
factory default.

See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.

2.Exit
On
Off*

3.Scan To
FTP

—

Color 100 dpi*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi

Enable or disable the
wireless LAN
manually.
Chooses the file
format to send the
scanned data via
FTP.

Color 600 dpi
Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
4.ScanTo N
etwork

—

Color 100 dpi*
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi

You can scan a black
and white or color
document directly to
a CIFS server on
your local network or
on the internet.

Gray 100 dpi
Gray 200 dpi
Gray 300 dpi
B&W 200 dpi
B&W 200x100 dpi
5.Time Zone

—

UTCXXX:XX

Sets the time zone
for your country.

0.Network
Reset

1.Reset

—

1.Yes

Restores all network
settings to factory
default.

2.No
2.Exit

216

—

Menu and features

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

8.Machine Info.
(MFC-9325CW)

1.Serial No.

—

You can check the
serial number of your
machine.

190

2.Page Counter

—

Total

You can check the
number of total
pages the machine
has printed during its
life.

190

You can check the
percentage of a
machine part’s life
that remains
available.

191

Chooses the receive
mode that best suits
your needs.

See
Quick
Setup
Guide.

6.Machine Info.
(MFC-9125CN)

Fax/List
Copy
Print
3.Parts Life

1.Drum

1.Black(K)
2.Cyan(C)
3.Magenta(M)
4.Yellow(Y)

0.Initial Se
tup

1.Receive Mode

2.Belt Unit

—

3.PF Kit

—

4.Fuser

—

Fax Only*
Fax/Tel

Page

External TAD
Manual
2.Date&Time

—

Puts the date and
time on the LCD and
in headings of faxes
you send.

3.Station ID

—

Fax:

Sets your name and
fax number to appear
on each page you
fax.

Tel:
Name:
4.Tone/Pulse

—

(in Canada)
4.Dial Tone

Tone*
Pulse

—

(in USA)

Detection
No Detection*

Chooses the dialing
mode.
You can shorten the
dial tone detect
pause.

143

Sets a prefix number
that will always be
added before the fax
number every time
you dial.

5.Dial Tone
(in Canada)
5.Dial Prefix
(in USA)
6.Dial Prefix
(in Canada)

—

217

Main Menu

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Descriptions

0.Initial Setup

6.Reset

1.Network

1.Reset

(Continued)

(in USA)

Restores all network
settings to factory
default.

2.Exit

Page
191

7.Reset
(in Canada)
2.Address & Fax

1.Reset
2.Exit

3.All Settings

1.Reset
2.Exit

0.Local Language

—

(in USA)
English*
Español
(in Canada)
English*
Français

218

Restores all stored
phone numbers and
fax settings.
Restores all the
machine settings to
factory default.
Allows you to change
the LCD language for
your country.

See
Quick
Setup
Guide.

Menu and features

Entering text

When setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you will need to type text
characters. The dial pad keys have letters printed on them. The keys: 0, # and l do not have
printed letters because they are used for special characters.
Press the appropriate dial pad key the number of times shown in this reference table to access
the character you want.
Press
Key

one
time

two
times

three
times

four
times

five
times

six
times

seven
times

eight
times

nine
times

For menu selections that do not allow lower case character selection, please use this reference
table.
Press Key

one time

two times

three times

four times

five times

Inserting spaces
To enter a space in a fax number, press c once between numbers. To enter a space in a name,
press c twice between characters.
Making corrections
If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press d to move the cursor to the incorrect
character, and then press Clear/Back.
Repeating letters
To enter a character on the same key as the previous character, press c to move the cursor right
before pressing the key again.

219

Special characters and symbols
Press l, # or 0, then press d or c to move the cursor to the symbol or character you want. Press
OK to choose it. The symbols and characters below will appear depending on your menu
selection.
Press l

for

(space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) l + , - . / m

Press #

for

:;<=>?@[]^_\~`|{}

Press 0

for

ÉÀÈÊÎÇËÖ0

220

Specifications

General

Printer Type

LED

Print Method

Electrophotographic LED

Memory Capacity

64 MB

LCD (liquid crystal display) 16 characters  2 lines
Power Source

110 - 120 V AC 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

Peak:

1176 W

Copying:

Average 480 W 1

Sleep:

(MFC-9125CN) Average 11 W

(MFC-9325CW) Average 12 W
Standby:

Average 75 W

Dimensions

15.8 in.
(401 mm)

16.9 in.
(428 mm)

19.3 in.
(491mm)

Weight

Without Drum/Toner Unit: 44.3 lb (20.1 kg)

Noise level

Sound power
Operating (Printing):

LWAd = 6.5 Bell (A)

Standby:

LWAd = 4.8 Bell (A)

Sound pressure

Operating (Printing):

LPAm = 53 dBA

Standby:

LPAm = 30 dBA

When making a copy from one sheet

221

Temperature
Humidity
ADF (automatic document
feeder)

Operating:

50 F to 90.5 F (10 to 32.5 C)

Storage:

32 F to 104 F (0 to 40 C)

Operating:

20 to 80% (without condensation)

Storage:

10 to 90% (without condensation)

Up to 35 pages (Staggered) 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Recommended Environment for Best Results:
Temperature: 68 F to 86 F (20 to 30 C)

Paper Tray

222

Humidity:

50% to 70%

Paper:

Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)

250 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Specifications

Print media
Paper Input

Paper Tray
 Paper Type:

Thin Paper, Plain Paper or Recycled Paper

 Paper Size:

Letter, A4, B5(ISO), A5, A5 (Long Edge),
B6(ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and Folio

 Paper Weight:

16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

 Maximum Paper Tray
Capacity:

Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Plain Paper

Manual Feed Slot
 Paper Type:

Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Thick Paper,
Thicker Paper, Bond Paper, Recycled
Paper, Envelopes or Labels 1

 Paper Size:

Width: 3 to 8.66 in. (76.2 to 220 mm) 2
Length: 4.57 to 16 in.
(116.0 to 406.4 mm) 2

 Paper Weight:

16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m2)

Paper Output Up to 100 sheets (face down print delivery to the output paper tray)
1

For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine
to avoid the possibility of smudging.

When using paper that is smaller than 4.1 x 5.8 in. (or A6 size) open the back cover (back output tray).

223

Fax

Compatibility

ITU-T Super Group 3

Coding System

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG

Modem Speed

Automatic Fallback:

33,600 bps

Document Size

ADF Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Height:

5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356.0 mm)

Scanner Glass Width:

Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)
Scanning Width

Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Printing Width

Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Gray Scale

8 bit/256 levels

Polling Types

Standard, Sequential

Contrast Control

Automatic/Light/Dark (manual setting)

Resolution

Horizontal:

203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)

Vertical
 Standard:

98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm)

 Fine:

196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)

 Photo:

196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)

 Superfine:

392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm)

One Touch Dial

8 (4  2)

Speed Dial

200 stations

Groups

Up to 20

Broadcasting

258 stations

Automatic Redial

Yes,1 time after 5 minutes

Ring Delay

0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings

Communication Source

Public switched telephone network

Memory Transmission

Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3

Out of Paper Reception

Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3

‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother Standard Chart No. 1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).
Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

Black & White only

224

Specifications

Copy

Copy Speed (Monochrome)

Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

Copy Speed (Full Color)

Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

Color/Monochrome

Yes/Yes

Document Size

ADF Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length:

5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm)

Scanner Glass Width:

Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Copy Width

Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)

Multiple Copies

Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

Reduce/Enlarge

25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Resolution

Up to 600  600 dpi

First Copy Out Time
(Monochrome)

Less than 19 seconds (from Ready mode)

First Copy Out Time (Color)

Less than 24 seconds (from Ready mode)

The copy speed may change depending on the type of document you copy.

225

Scan

Color/Monochrome

Yes/Yes

TWAIN Compliant

Yes (Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/
Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x 1

WIA Compliant

Yes (Windows® XP/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)

Color Depth

24 bit color

Resolution

Up to 19200  19200 dpi (interpolated) 2
Up to 1200  2400 dpi (optical) (From Scanner Glass)
Up to 1200  600 dpi (optical) (From ADF)

Document Size

ADF Width:

5.8 to 8.5 in. (148.0 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length:

5.8 to 14 in. (148.0 to 355.6 mm)

Scanner Glass Width:

Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length:

Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Scanning Width

Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)

Gray Scale

256 levels

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Maximum 1200  1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® XP/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7 (resolution up
to 19200  19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)

226

Specifications

Emulations

PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript®3™)

Printer Driver

Host-Based Driver for Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional x64
Edition/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7/Windows Server® 2003 1/
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/Windows Server® 2008 1/
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 1
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional
x64 Edition/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7/Windows Server® 2003 1/
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/Windows Server® 2008 1/
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 1
Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 2
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 2

Resolution

600 dpi  600 dpi, 2400 dpi (600  2400)

Print Speed
(Monochrome)

Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 3

Print Speed (Color)

Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 3

First Print Out Time
(Monochrome)

Less than 15 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Print Out Time
(Color)

Less than 16 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time
(Monochrome)

Less than 19 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time
(Color)

Less than 24 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

Print only via network.

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

The print speed may change depending on the type of document you print.

227

Interfaces

USB

Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m). 1 2

LAN 3

Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.

Wireless LAN
(MFC-9325CW)

Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication with
your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless
Peer-to-Peer connection in Ad-hoc mode.

Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a
USB 1.1 interface.

Third party USB ports are not supported.

See Ethernet wired network on page 233 and the Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM for detailed network
specifications.

228

Specifications

PictBridge (MFC-9325CW)
Compatibility

Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association PictBridge
standard CIPA-001. Visit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/ for more
information.

Interface

USB direct interface.

229

Direct Print feature (MFC-9325CW)
Compatibility

PDF version 1.7 1, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother
printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),
PostScript®3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS
version 1.0.

PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.

230

Specifications

Computer requirements

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions
Processor
Computer Platform &
Minimum Recommended Hard Disk Space
Supported
Minimum Speed RAM
Operating System
RAM
to install
PC
Version
Software
For
For
Drivers Applications Functions
Windows®
Windows® XP
Intel® Pentium® II 128 MB 256 MB 150 MB 310 MB Printing,
Operating Home 2 5
or equivalent
PC Fax 4,
1
Scanning
System
Windows® XP
Professional 2 5
Windows® XP
Professional
x64 Edition 2
Windows
Vista® 2

Windows® 7 2

Macintosh
Operating
System

Windows
Server® 2003
(print only via
network)
Windows
Server®
2003 x64
Edition (print
only via
network)
Windows
Server® 2008
(print only via
network)
Windows
Server® 2008
R2 (print only
via network)
Mac OS X
10.4.11
10.5.x
Mac OS X
10.6.x

Supported
PC
Interface 3
USB,
10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

256 MB

512 MB

Intel® Pentium® 4 or
equivalent 64-bit
(Intel®64 or AMD64)
supported CPU
Intel® Pentium® 4 or
equivalent 64-bit
(Intel®64 or AMD64)
supported CPU
Intel® Pentium® III
or equivalent

512 MB

1 GB

500 MB

1 GB
(32-bit)
2 GB
(64-bit)

650 MB

1.2 GB

256 MB

512 MB

50 MB

N/A

802.11 b/g 6

Printing

10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless

64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64)
supported CPU

802.11 b/g 6

Intel® Pentium® 4 or
equivalent 64-bit
(Intel®64 or AMD64)
supported CPU
64-bit (Intel®64 or
AMD64) supported
CPU

512 MB

2 GB

PowerPC® G4/G5
Intel® Processor

512 MB

1 GB

Intel® Processor

1 GB

2 GB

80 MB

400 MB

Printing,
PC Fax
Send 4,
Scanning

USB,
10/100
Base Tx
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11 b/g 6

1
2
3
4
5
6

Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.
For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
PC Fax supports black and white only.
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP2 or higher for Windows® XP.
MFC-9325CW only

For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/.
All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.
231

Consumable items
Toner Cartridge Life

Starter Toner Cartridge:

Approx. 1,000 pages
(Letter) 1

Standard Toner Cartridge:
TN-210BK (Black):

Approx. 2,200 pages
(Letter) 1

TN-210C (Cyan):

Approx. 1,400 pages
(Letter) 1

TN-210M (Magenta):

Approx. 1,400 pages
(Letter) 1

TN-210Y (Yellow):

Approx. 1,400 pages
(Letter) 1

Drum Unit

DR-210CL 2, DR-210CL-BK 3,
DR-210CL-CMY 4

Approx. 15,000 pages
(Letter) 5

Belt Unit

BU-200CL

Approx. 50,000 pages
(Letter)

Waste Toner Box

WT-200CL

Approx. 50,000 pages

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Contains 4 pc. Drum Set

Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit

Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit

Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.

232

Specifications

Ethernet wired network
Network board
model name

NC-6700h

LAN

You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup. 1 2

Support for

Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition,
Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003 2,
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 2, Windows Server® 2008 2,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 2

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 3
Protocols

Network type

IPv4:

ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),
WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMP, LLTD responder,
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

IPv6:

(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMPv6, LLTD responder, Web Services Print,
CIFS Client, SNTP

Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)

233

Management
utilities 4

BRAdmin Light for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64
Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition and Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X,
10.6.X 3
BRAdmin Professional for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional
x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition
Web BRAdmin for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64
Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition
Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.

PC Fax Send for Mac

Print only via network.

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

234

Specifications

Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9325CW)
Network board
model name

NC-7500W

LAN

You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup 1 2.

Support for

Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition,
Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64 Edition and Windows Server® 2008 R2
Edition

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 3
Protocols

Network type

IPv4:

ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),
WINS, NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMP, LLTD responder,
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

IPv6:

(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMPv6, LLTD responder,
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)

235

Management
utilities 4

PC Fax Send for Mac

Only printing for Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

236

Specifications

Authentication and encryption for wireless users only

Authentication method

The Brother machine supports the following methods:
 Open system
Wireless devices are allowed to access the network without any authentication.
 Shared key
A secret pre-determined key is shared by all devices that will access the wireless network. The
Brother machine uses the WEP keys as the pre-determined key.
 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Enables a Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK), which enables
the Brother wireless machine to associate with access points using TKIP for WPA-PSK or AES
for WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK (WPA-Personal).
 LEAP
Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) has been developed by Cisco Systems,
Inc. and enables the Brother wireless product to associate with access points using CKIP
encryptions.
 EAP-FAST
EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol - Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunnel)
has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc. which uses user ID and password for
authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
MS-CHAPv2 is used for Provisioning, and the method of EAP-FAST corresponding to
second phase authentication method.
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses MS-CHAPv2 for inner method.
• EAP-FAST/GTC
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses GTC for inner method.

237

Encryption methods

Encryption is used to secure the data that is sent over the wireless network. The Brother machine
supports the following encryption methods:
 WEP
By using WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy), the data is transmitted and received with a secure
key.
 TKIP
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) provides per-packet key mixing a message integrity
check and re-keying mechanism.
 AES
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is Wi-Fi authorized strong encryption standard.
 CKIP
The original Key Integrity Protocol for LEAP by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Network key
There are some rules for each security method:
 Open system/Shared key with WEP
This key is a 64-bit or 128-bit value that must be entered in an ASCII or hexadecimal format.
• 64 (40) bit ASCII:
Uses 5 text characters. e.g.“WSLAN” (this is case sensitive).
• 64 (40) bit hexadecimal:
Uses 10 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234aba”.
• 128 (104) bit ASCII:
Uses 13 text characters. e.g.“Wirelesscomms” (this is case sensitive).
• 128 (104) bit hexadecimal:
Uses 26 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234ab56cd709e5412aa2ba”.
 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK and TKIP or AES
Uses a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) that is 8 or more characters in length, up to a maximum of
63 characters.
 LEAP
Uses User ID and Password.
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.
 EAP-FAST
Uses User ID and Password.
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.
238

Specifications

Wireless one-push configuration

If your wireless access point supports either Wi-Fi Protected Setup (PBC 1) or AOSS™, you can
configure the machine easily without a computer. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router
/ access point and using the menu on the machine, you can set up the wireless network and
security settings. See the User’s Guide for your wireless LAN router / access point for instructions
on how to access one-push mode.
1

Push Button Configuration

Note
Routers or access points that support Wi-Fi Protected Setup or AOSS™ have the symbols
shown below.

239

Glossary

This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of
these features depends on the model you purchased.
ADF (automatic document feeder)
The document can be placed in the ADF
and scanned one page at a time
automatically.
Address Book (

)

A pre-programmed number for easy
dialing. You must press
(Address Book), then enter the threedigit Speed Dial location and press Start
to begin the dialing process.
Auto Reduction
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Automatic fax transmission
Sending a fax without picking up the
handset of the external telephone or
pressing Hook.
Automatic Redial
A feature that enables your machine to
redial the last fax number after five
minutes if the fax did not go through
because the line was busy.
Backup Print
Your machine prints a copy of every fax
that is received and stored in memory.
This is a safety feature so you will not lose
messages during a power failure.
Batch Transmission
As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes
to the same fax number will be sent as one
transmission.
Beeper Volume
Volume setting for the beep when you
press a key or make an error.
Broadcasting
The ability to send the same fax message
to more than one location.

240

Cancel Job
Cancels a programmed print job and
clears the machine’s memory.
CNG tones
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax
machines during automatic transmission
to tell the receiving machine that a fax
machine is calling.
Coding method
Method of coding the information
contained in the document. All fax
machines must use a minimum standard
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine
is capable of greater compression
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the
receiving machine has the same
capability.
Communication error (or Comm. Error)
An error during fax sending or receiving,
usually caused by line noise or static.
Compatibility group
The ability of one fax unit to communicate
with another. Compatibility is assured
between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast
Setting to compensate for dark or light
documents, by making faxes or copies of
dark documents lighter and light
documents darker.
Delayed Fax
Sends your fax at a specified later time
that day.

Glossary

Distinctive Ring
A subscriber service purchased from the
telephone company that gives you
another telephone number on an existing
telephone line. The Brother machine uses
the new number to simulate a dedicated
fax line.

Fax Storage
You can store faxes in the memory.

Dual Access
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or
scheduled jobs into memory at the same
time it is sending a fax or receiving or
printing an incoming fax.

Fax/Tel
You can receive faxes and telephone
calls. Do not use this mode if you are
using a telephone answering device
(TAD).

Easy Receive
Enables your machine to respond to CNG
tones if you interrupt a fax call by
answering it.

Fine resolution
Resolution is 203  196 dpi. It is used for
small print and graphs.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Detects errors during fax transmission
and resends the pages of the fax that had
an error.
Extension telephone
A telephone on the fax number that is
plugged into a separate telephone wall
jack.
External telephone
A telephone that is plugged into the EXT
jack of your machine.
F/T Ring Time
The length of time that the Brother
machine pseudo/double-rings (when the
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify
you to pick up a voice call that it answered.
Fax Forwarding
Sends a fax received into the memory to
another pre-programmed fax number.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last
200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX
means Transmit. RX means Receive.
Fax Receive Code
Press this code (l51) when you answer a
fax call on an extension or external
telephone.

Fax tones
The signals sent by sending and receiving
fax machines while communicating
information.

Gray Scale
The shades of gray available for copying
and faxing photographs.
Group number
A combination of One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location
for Broadcasting.
Help List
A printout of the complete Menu table that
you can use to program your machine
when you do not have the User’s Guide
with you.
Journal Period
The pre-programmed time period
between automatically printed Fax
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax
Journal on demand without interrupting
the cycle.
LCD (liquid crystal display)
The display screen on the machine that
shows interactive messages during
On-Screen Programming and shows the
date and time when the machine is idle.
Manual fax
When you lift the handset of your external
telephone or press Hook so you can hear
the receiving fax machine answer before
you press Start to begin transmission.

241

Menu mode
Programming mode for changing your
machine’s settings.
OCR (optical character recognition)
The bundled ScanSoft™
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR or Presto!
PageManager software application
converts an image of text to text you can
edit.
One Touch
Keys on the machine’s control panel
where you can store numbers for easy
dialing. You can store a second number
on each key if you press Shift and the
One Touch key together.
Out of Paper Reception
Receives faxes into the machine’s
memory when the machine is out of paper.
Overseas Mode
Makes temporary changes to the fax
tones to accommodate noise and static on
overseas telephone lines.
Paging
This feature enables your machine to call
your pager when a fax is received into its
memory.
Pause
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in
the dialing sequence while you are dialing
using the dial pad or while you are storing
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
Press Redial/Pause as many times as
needed for longer pauses.

Remaining Jobs
You can check which programmed fax
jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel
the jobs individually.
Remote Access Code
Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that
allows you to call and access your
machine from a remote location.
Remote Retrieval Access
The ability to access your machine
remotely from a touch tone telephone.
Resolution
The number of vertical and horizontal lines
per inch.
Ring Delay
The number of rings before the machine
answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel
modes.
Ring Volume
Volume setting for the machine’s ring.
Scanning
The process of sending an electronic
image of a paper document into your
computer.
Search
An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored
One Touch, Speed Dial and Group
numbers.
Station ID
The stored information that appears on
the top of faxed pages. It includes the
sender’s name and fax number.

Polling
The process of a fax machine calling
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax
messages.

TAD (telephone answering device)
You can connect an external device or
answering machine to the EXT. jack of
your machine.

Pulse (Canada only)
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone
line.

Telephone Answer Code
(Fax/Tel mode only)
When the machine answers a voice call, it
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at
an extension telephone by pressing this
code (#51).

Real Time Transmission
When memory is full, you can send faxes
in real time.

242

Glossary

Tel Index List
A listing of names and numbers stored in
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in
numerical order.
Temporary settings
You can choose certain options for each
fax transmission and copy without
changing the default settings.
Tone
A form of dialing on the telephone line
used for Touch Tone telephones.
Transmission
The process of sending faxes over the
telephone lines from your machine to the
receiving fax machine.

Transmission Verification Report
A report for each transmission, that shows
its date, time and number.
User Settings List
A printed report that shows the current
settings of the machine.

243

Index

A
Accessories and supplies .......................... ii
Address book ................................ 8, 63, 64
ADF (automatic document feeder)
faxing ....................................................38
using .....................................................23
Answering machine (TAD)
connecting .............................................58
Apple Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Automatic
fax receive .............................................48
easy receive .......................................50
fax redial ...............................................64

B
Belt unit
replacing .............................................181
Broadcasting ............................................39
canceling ...............................................40
setting up groups for .............................69
Brother
accessories and supplies ........................ ii
Brother numbers ...................................... i
Customer Service .................................... i
FAQs (frequently asked questions) .......... i
product support ........................................ i
service centers ......................................... i
warranties .................................... iii, iv, vi

C
Canceling
broadcast in process .............................40
fax jobs in memory ................................45
fax storage ............................................73
jobs awaiting redial ...............................45
remote fax options ................................75
Cleaning
corona wires ........................................160
drum unit .............................................162
LED head ............................................159
scanner ...............................................158
Connecting
244

external TAD (answering machine) ...... 57
external telephone ................................ 61
two-line external TAD or telephone ...... 59
Consumable items ......................... 169, 170
Control panel overview .............................. 6
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
ControlCenter3 (for Windows®)
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Copy
contrast ........................................... 86, 89
Enlarge/Reduce key ............................. 87
enter copy mode ................................... 86
keys .................................................. 8, 87
multiple ................................................. 86
N in 1 (page layout) .............................. 91
Options key .......................................... 88
out of memory ...................................... 92
quality ................................................... 89
single .................................................... 86
sort (ADF only) ..................................... 89
temporary settings ................................ 87
using ADF ....................................... 89, 91
using scanner glass ........................ 91, 92
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 61
Corona wires ......................................... 161
Cover page .............................................. 41
custom comments ................................ 41
for all faxes ........................................... 42
for next fax only .................................... 41
printed form .......................................... 42
Custom Ringing ....................................... 54

Data Ident-A-Call .....................................54
Delayed batch transmission .....................44
Dialing
a pause .................................................64
access codes and credit card numbers 71
automatic fax redial ...............................64
dial prefix ..............................................28
groups (broadcasting) ...........................39
manual ..................................................63
one touch ..............................................63
restricting dialing ...................................35
speed dial .............................................63
using the Search key ............................64
Direct print ................................................99
Direct key ............................................100
specification ........................................230
Distinctive ring ..........................................54
choosing ring pattern ............................55
setting ring pattern ................................55
turning off ..............................................56
Document
how to load .................................... 23, 24
jam ......................................................151
Drum unit
checking (remaining life) .....................191
cleaning ..................................... 160, 162
Dual access .............................................43

Fax codes
changing ......................................... 62, 76
fax receive code ................................... 61
remote access code ............................. 76
telephone answer code ........................ 61
Fax forwarding
changing remotely .......................... 77, 78
programming a number ........................ 72
Fax storage ............................................. 73
printing from memory ........................... 52
turning off ............................................. 75
turning on ............................................. 73
Fax, stand-alone
receiving ............................................... 46
at end of conversation ....................... 51
easy receive ...................................... 50
fax forwarding .................................... 78
fax receive stamp .............................. 51
from extension telephone .................. 61
into memory (fax storage) ................. 73
paging ............................................... 73
polling receive ................................... 79
reducing to fit on paper ..................... 51
retrieving from a remote site ....... 77, 78
ring delay, setting .............................. 49
sequential polling .............................. 79
telephone line interference .............. 143
sending ................................................. 38
at end of conversation ....................... 45
broadcasting ...................................... 39
canceling from memory ..................... 45
contrast ............................................. 42
delayed batch .................................... 44
delayed fax ........................................ 44
from ADF ........................................... 38
from memory (dual access) ............... 43
from scanner glass ............................ 38
manual .............................................. 45
overseas ............................................ 44
polled transmit ................................... 80
real time transmission ....................... 43
resolution ........................................... 42
telephone line interference .............. 143
Fax/Tel mode
answering at extension telephones ...... 61
easy receive ......................................... 50
F/T ring time (double-ring) .................... 49

E
EAP-FAST .............................................237
Enlarge/Reduce key .................................87
Envelopes .............................14, 18, 19, 21
Labels ...................................................14
Equalization ...........................................143
Error messages on LCD ........................144
Comm. Error .......................................145
Init Unable XX .....................................146
No Paper .............................................146
Out of Memory ....................................147
Print Unable XX ..................................147
Scan Unable XX .................................149
Extension telephone, using ......................61
External telephone, connecting ................61

245

fax receive code ....................................61
receiving faxes ......................................61
ring delay ..............................................49
telephone answer code .........................61
Folio .................................................. 19, 25

G
Gray scale ..................................... 224, 226
Groups for broadcasting ..........................69

H
HELP ........................................................83
Help List ................................................83
LCD messages ...................................197
Menu Table ................................ 197, 199
using menu keys .................................197
Hook key ............................................. 8, 61

I
Ident-A-Call ..............................................54
Ident-A-Ring .............................................54

J
Jacks
convert to RJ11 jack
triplex adapter ....................................59
EXT
external telephone .............................61
TAD (answering machine) .................57
Jams
document ............................................151
paper ...................................................152

L
Labels ............................ 13, 14, 18, 19, 22
LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 8, 197
contrast .................................................28
Help List ................................................82

246

M
Machine information
checking remaining life of parts .......... 191
page counts ........................................ 190
status LED ............................................ 10
Macintosh
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Maintenance, routine ............................. 157
checking the remaining life of parts .... 191
replacing
belt unit ............................................ 181
drum units ....................................... 176
toner cartridge ................................. 171
waste toner box ............................... 185
Manual
dialing ................................................... 63
receive ............................................ 46, 48
transmission ......................................... 45
Memory
adding DIMM (option) ......................... 126
installing .......................................... 126
storage ............................................... 197
Menu Table ................................... 197, 199
using menu keys ................................ 197
Mode, entering
copy ...................................................... 86
fax ......................................................... 38
scan ........................................................ 9
Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 60

N
N in 1 (page layout) ................................. 91
Network
faxing
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
printing
See Network User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
scanning
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.

O
One touch
changing ...............................................68
setting up ..............................................65
using .....................................................63
Out of Memory message ... 45, 92, 98, 103,
147

P
Packing and shipping the machine ........192
Page layout (N in 1) .................................91
Paging ......................................................73
programming your cell number .............73
programming your pager number .........72
Paper .............................................. 18, 223
how to load ...........................................11
in manual feed slot .............................13
in paper tray .......................................11
jam ......................................................152
recommended ................................ 18, 19
size ................................................ 18, 25
size of document ........................ 225, 226
tray capacity ..........................................19
type ................................................ 18, 25
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM and Help in the PaperPort™
11SE application to access How-to-Guides
PC Fax
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Personalized Ring ....................................54
PictBridge
DPOF printing .......................................96
specification ........................................229
Polling
polled transmit ......................................80
polling receive .......................................79
sequential polling ..................................79
Power failure ..........................................197
Print
difficulties ................................... 128, 132
drivers .................................................227
fax from memory ...................................52
paper jams ..........................................152
quality ........................................ 134, 136
reports ...................................................82

resolution ............................................ 227
specifications ...................................... 227
Printing
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Programming your machine .................. 197

Q
Quality
copying ........................................... 88, 89
printing ....................................... 134, 136
Quick dial ................................................. 65
access codes and credit card numbers 71
broadcasting ......................................... 39
using groups ...................................... 39
group dial
changing ............................................ 68
setting up groups for broadcasting .... 69
one touch dial
changing ............................................ 68
custom scan profile ........................... 65
setting up ........................................... 65
using .................................................. 63
search .................................................. 64
speed dial
changing ............................................ 68
custom scan profile ........................... 66
setting up ........................................... 66
using .................................................. 63

247

Redial/Pause key .............................. 64, 71
Reducing
copies ....................................................87
incoming faxes ......................................51
Remote retrieval .......................................76
access code ..........................................76
commands ............................................78
getting your faxes ..................................77
Remote setup
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Replacing
belt unit ...............................................181
drum units ...........................................176
toner cartridge .....................................171
waste toner box ...................................185
Reports ............................................. 81, 82
Fax Journal ...........................................82
journal period .....................................82
Help List ................................................82
how to print ...........................................83
Network Configuration ..........................82
Tel Index List .........................................82
Transmission Verification ......................81
User Settings ........................................82
Resolution
copy ....................................................225
fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo) .. 42, 224
print .....................................................227
scan ....................................................226
setting for next fax .................................42
Resolution key .................................... 8, 42
Restricted users .......................................31
Ring delay, setting ...................................49
RingMaster ...............................................54

Safety instructions ................................. 117
Scanner glass
faxing .................................................... 38
using ..................................................... 24
Scanning
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Secure key ................................................ 8
Security
Memory Security .................................. 32
restricting dialing .................................. 35
Secure function lock
administrator password ..................... 29
Public user mode .............................. 30
restricted users .................................. 31
Setting lock ........................................... 34
Serial number
how to find ...............See inside front cover
Service centers ............................................i
Shipping the machine ............................ 192
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing ... 54
Sleep time ............................................... 27
Smart Ring .............................................. 54
Sort .......................................................... 89
Speed dial
changing ............................................... 68
setting up .............................................. 66
using ..................................................... 63
Status LED .............................................. 10

248

TAD (telephone answering device),
external ....................................... 46, 48, 59
connecting ..................................... 57, 58
recording OGM .....................................58
with two-line jack ...................................59
Teen Ring ................................................54
Telephone line
connections ...........................................58
coverting wall outlets ............................59
difficulties ............................................129
interference .........................................143
multi-line (PBX) .....................................60
roll over lines .........................................59
two-line telephone system ....................59
Temporary copy settings ..........................87
Text, entering .........................................219
Toner Save ..............................................27
Troubleshooting .....................................128
document jam .....................................151
error messages on LCD ......................144
if you are having difficulty
copy quality ......................................132
incoming calls ..................................131
network ............................................134
paper handling .................................133
print quality ............................. 134, 136
printing .................................... 128, 132
receiving faxes .................................129
scanning ..........................................133
sending faxes ...................................131
software ...........................................133
telephone line ..................................143
maintenance messages on LCD .........144
paper jam ............................................152
Two-line telephone system ......................59

Warranties
Canada ...................................................vi
Notice-Disclaimer ................................... iii
USA ........................................................iv
Waste toner box
replacing ............................................. 185
Windows®
See Software User’s Guide on the
CD-ROM.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.
World Wide Web .........................................i

V
Voice Mail ................................................53
VoIP
interference/VoIP ................................143
Volume, setting
beeper ...................................................26
ring ........................................................26
speaker .................................................26

249

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS
(Canada only)
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.

Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6

Visit us on the World Wide Web
http://www.brother.com/

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 267
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:30d2a485-ac00-418c-a981-69ef93f46a44
Modify Date                     : 2011:06:10 13:11:42+09:00
Create Date                     : 2011:06:08 10:02:09+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:06:10 13:11:42+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:b184fb4c-f6e6-4a5e-a510-efa709f03ba5
Instance ID                     : uuid:13dba36d-a2d7-414b-9e4d-ed4a9efa8bcf
Format                          : application/pdf

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Brother Mfc 9325Cw Owner S Manual

Brother-Mfc-9125Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9125cn-owner-s-manual

MFC-9325CW en-US%5CMFC%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_MFC_9125CN_9325CW_EN_5693

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation